pdf-huawei-echolife-ont-v300r019c20ampv500r019c20-web-page-reference-01-enterprisepdf compress
advertisement
Huawei EchoLife ONT V300R019C20&V500R019C20 Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Issue 01 Date 2019-09-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks trademarks and trade names men mentioned tioned in this this document a are re the property of of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer.. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the customer purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations representatio ns of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. recommendations Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Huawei Industrial Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: support@huawei.com Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents Contents 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5)....................... EG8040H5 )............................................. ............................................ ............................................. ............................................. ............................................ ..........................1 ....1 1.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface........................................................................................................................1 Interface........................................................................................................................1 1.2 Status............................................................................................................. Status.............................................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 4 1.2.1 Eth Port Information....................................................................................................................................................4 1.2.2 Optical Information................................................................................................... Information..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 4 1.2.3 Device Information......................................................................................................................................................5 Information......................................................................................................................................................5 1.2.4 Service Provisioning Status......................................................................................................................................... Status.........................................................................................................................................6 6 1.3 LAN................................................................................................... LAN................................................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................6 6 1.3.1 LAN Host Host Configuration............................................................................................................................................. Configuration.............................................................................................................................................6 6 1.4 Security...........................................................................................................................................................................6 Security...........................................................................................................................................................................6 1.4.1 MAC Filter Filter Configuration........................................................................................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................................7 7 1.5 System To Tools...................................................................................................................................................................7 ols...................................................................................................................................................................7 1.5.1 Reboot..........................................................................................................................................................................8 Reboot..........................................................................................................................................................................8 1.5.2 Configuration Configuration File.................................................................................. File........................................................................................................................................................8 ......................................................................8 1.5.3 Firmware Upgrade....................................................................................................................................................... Upgrade.......................................................................................................................................................9 9 1.5.4 Restore Default Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration.....................................................................................................................................9 .......................................................9 1.5.5 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................10 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................10 1.5.6 Log.............................................................................................................................................................................10 Log.............................................................................................................................................................................10 1.5.7 ONT Authentication.................................................................. Authentication.................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................ 11 1.5.8 Advanced Advanced Power Management..................................................................................................................................12 1.5.9 Modify Login Password.............................................................................................. Password............................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 12 1.5.10 Fault Info Info Collect..................................................................................................................................................... Collect.....................................................................................................................................................13 13 1.5.11 Indicator Indicator Status Management...................................................................... Management.................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 13 1.5.12 Open Source Source Software Notice.............................................................................. Notice................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 14 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H)........... EG8242H)................................. ............................................ ............................................. ............................................. .........................................15 ...................15 2.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface......................................................................................................................16 Interface......................................................................................................................16 2.2 Status............................................................................................................. Status............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................... 19 2.2.1 WAN Information...................................................................................................................................................... Information......................................................................................................................................................19 19 2.2.2 VoIP VoIP Information....................................................................................................................................................... 21 2.2.3 Eth Port Information..................................................................................................................................................21 2.2.4 Optical Information................................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 22 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 2.2.5 Device Information....................................................................................................................................................22 2.2.6 Remote Management................................................................................................................................................. Management.................................................................................................................................................23 23 2.2.7 Service Provisioning Status....................................................................................................................................... Status....................................................................................................................................... 23 2.3 WAN................................................................................ AN............................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................. 24 2.3.1 WAN Configuration............................................................................. Configuration...................................................................................................................................................24 ......................................................................24 2.3.2 DHCP Client Option Configuration.......................................................................................................................... Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 26 2.3.3 DHCP Client Client Request Parameter Configuration......................................................................................... Configuration....................................................................................................... .............. 27 2.4 LAN.................................................................................................... LAN.............................................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................28 28 2.4.1 LAN Host Host Configuration........................................................................................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................................28 28 2.5 Security.........................................................................................................................................................................29 Security.........................................................................................................................................................................29 2.5.1 MAC Filter Filter Configuration......................................................................................................................................... Configuration.........................................................................................................................................29 29 2.5.2 DoS Configuration.....................................................................................................................................................30 Configuration.....................................................................................................................................................30 2.5.3 Precise Device Access Control.................................................................................................................................. Control..................................................................................................................................31 31 2.5.4 Device Access Control............................................................................................. Control.............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 32 2.5.5 WAN Access Access Control Configuration......................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................... 32 2.6 Network Applications...................................................................................................................................................33 2.6.1 ARP Ping......................................................................................... Ping................................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 33 2.7 Voice........................................................................................................... Voice............................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. 34 2.7.1 VoIP Basic Basic Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... Configuration..........................................................................................................................................34 34 2.7.2 VoIP Advanced Advanced Configuration........................................................................ Configuration...................................................................................................................................40 ...........................................................40 2.7.3 SIP/H.248 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion.................................................................................. Conversion................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 52 2.8 System To Tools.................................................................................................................................................................52 ols.................................................................................................................................................................52 2.8.1 Reboot........................................................................................................................................................................52 Reboot........................................................................................................................................................................52 2.8.2 Configuration Configuration File.................................................................................. File......................................................................................................................................................53 ....................................................................53 2.8.3 Firmware Upgrade..................................................................................................................................................... Upgrade.....................................................................................................................................................53 53 2.8.4 Restore Default Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration...................................................................................................................................54 .....................................................54 2.8.5 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................54 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................54 2.8.6 VoIP Statistics............................................................................................................................................................55 Statistics............................................................................................................................................................55 2.8.7 VoIP Diagnose......................................................................................... Diagnose........................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 55 2.8.8 Remote Mirror............................................................................................................... Mirror........................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 56 2.8.9 User Log..................................................................................... Log.................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... 57 2.8.10 Debug Log................................................ Log..................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. ......... 58 2.8.11 One-Click One-Click Diagnosis................................................................................................................................................59 2.8.12 ONT Authentication................................................................ Authentication................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................ 60 2.8.13 Time Setting.............................................................................................................................................................61 Setting.............................................................................................................................................................61 2.8.14 TR-069.....................................................................................................................................................................62 TR-069.....................................................................................................................................................................62 2.8.15 Advanced Advanced Power Management................................................................................................................................64 2.8.16 Modify Login Password............................................................................................ Password.......................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 65 2.8.17 Fault Info Info Collect..................................................................................................................................................... Collect.....................................................................................................................................................65 65 2.8.18 Indicator Indicator Status Management.................................................................................................................................. Management.................................................................................................................................. 66 2.8.19 Open Source Source Software Notice.............................................................................. Notice................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 66 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W)...................... EG8247W)......................68 68 3.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface......................................................................................................................69 Interface......................................................................................................................69 3.2 Status........................................................................................... Status............................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. 72 3.2.1 WAN Information...................................................................................................................................................... Information......................................................................................................................................................72 72 3.2.2 VoIP Information.................................................................................... ormation....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 74 3.2.3 WLAN Information..................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 74 3.2.4 Home Network Network Information..................................................................................... Information...................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 75 3.2.5 Eth Port Information..................................................................................................................................................76 3.2.6 DHCP Information................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 76 3.2.7 Optical Information................................................................................. Information................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 77 3.2.8 Battery Information................................................................................. Information................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 77 3.2.9 Device Information....................................................................................................................................................78 Information....................................................................................................................................................78 3.2.10 Remote Remote Manage....................................................................................................................................................... Manage.......................................................................................................................................................78 78 3.2.11 User Device Device Information............................................................................................ Information......................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 79 3.2.12 Service Provisioning Status..................................................................................................................................... Status.....................................................................................................................................79 79 3.2.13 Cloud Platform Status..............................................................................................................................................79 3.3 WAN................................................................................................. WAN............................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................ 80 3.3.1 WAN Configuration...................................................................................................................................................80 Configuration...................................................................................................................................................80 3.3.2 DHCP Client Client Option Configuration................................................................................................ Configuration.......................................................................................................................... .......................... 87 3.3.3 DHCP Client Client Request Parameter Configuration.......................................................................................... Configuration....................................................................................................... ............. 88 3.4 LAN.................................................................................................... LAN.............................................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................89 89 3.4.1 LAN Port Port Work Mode....................................................................................................... Mode............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 89 3.4.2 LAN Host Host Configuration........................................................................................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................................90 90 3.4.3 DHCP Server Server Configuration......................................................................................................................................91 3.4.4 DHCP Server Server Option Configuration....................................................................... Configuration..........................................................................................................................93 ...................................................93 3.4.5 DHCP Static Static IP Configuration................................................................................... Configuration.................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 94 3.5 PORT........................................................................................................... PORT............................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. 95 3.5.1 ETH.......................................................................................................... ETH........................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 95 3.6 IPv6...............................................................................................................................................................................95 IPv6...............................................................................................................................................................................95 3.6.1 Default Route Configuration...................................................................................... Configuration..................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 95 3.6.2 Static Route Configuration.............................................................................................................................. Configuration........................................................................................................................................ .......... 96 3.6.3 LAN Address Address Configuration................................................................................... Configuration..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 97 3.6.4 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration.............................................................................................................................. Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 99 3.6.5 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Information................................................................................................ Information.............................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 100 3.7 WLAN............................................................................................ WLAN........................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................ 100 3.7.1 2.4G Basic Basic Network Settings.................................................................................................. Settings...................................................................................................................................100 .................................100 3.7.2 2.4G Advanced Advanced Network Settings............................................................................................... Settings........................................................................................................................... ............................ 103 3.7.3 5G Basic Basic Network Settings..................................................................................................... Settings......................................................................................................................................104 .................................104 3.7.4 5G Advanced Advanced Network Settings.................................................................................................. Settings.............................................................................................................................. ............................ 107 3.7.5 Automatic Automatic WiFi Shutdown...................................................................................................................................... Shutdown...................................................................................................................................... 108 3.7.6 WiFi Coverage Coverage Management................................................................................................................................... Management...................................................................................................................................109 109 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 3.7.7 Z-Wave Control............................................................................................................... ........................................ 109 Control....................................................................................................................................................... 3.8 Security....................................................................................................................................................................... Security....................................................................................................................................................................... 110 3.8.1 Firewall Level Configuration...................................................................................................................................110 Configuration...................................................................................................................................110 3.8.2 IP Filter Configuration.............................................................................................................................................110 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................110 3.8.3 MAC Filter Configuration....................................................................................................................................... Configuration....................................................................................................................................... 112 3.8.4 WLAN MAC Filter Configuration.......................................................................................................................... Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 113 3.8.5 Parental Control Configuration............................................................................... Configuration................................................................................................................................114 .................................................114 3.8.6 URL Filter Filter Configuration................................................................................................................................. Configuration........................................................................................................................................ ....... 115 3.8.7 DoS Configuration...................................................................................................................................................115 Configuration...................................................................................................................................................115 3.8.8 Precise Device Access Control................................................................................................................................ Control................................................................................................................................ 117 3.8.9 Device Access Control............................................................................................. Control.............................................................................................................................................117 ................................................117 3.8.10 WAN Access Control Configuration..................................................................................................................... Configuration..................................................................................................................... 118 3.9 Route...........................................................................................................................................................................119 Route...........................................................................................................................................................................119 3.9.1 Default Route Configuration....................................................................................... Configuration................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 119 3.9.2 Static Route Configuration.............................................................................................................................. Configuration...................................................................................................................................... ........ 120 3.9.3 Dynamic Dynamic Route Configuration............................................................................... Configuration.................................................................................................................................121 ..................................................121 3.9.4 Policy Route Configuration..................................................................................................................................... Configuration.....................................................................................................................................122 122 3.9.5 VLAN Binding Configuration................................................................................................................................. Configuration.................................................................................................................................123 123 3.9.6 Service Route Configuration....................................................................................... Configuration................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 123 3.9.7 Routing Table...........................................................................................................................................................124 3.10 Forward Rules...........................................................................................................................................................124 3.10.1 DMZ Configuration...............................................................................................................................................124 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................124 3.10.2 Port Mapping Mapping Configuration..................................................................................................................................125 3.10.3 Port Trigger Configuration............................................................................... Configuration.................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 128 3.11 Network Applications...............................................................................................................................................129 3.11.1 USB Application..................................................................... pplication....................................................................................................................................................129 ...............................................................................129 3.11.2 Home Sharing................................................................................... Sharing........................................................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 131 3.11.3 Media Sharing........................................................................................................................................................132 3.11.4 ALG Configuration................................................................................................................................................132 Configuration................................................................................................................................................132 3.11.5 UPnP Configuration...............................................................................................................................................133 3.11.6 ARP Configuration............................................................................................. Configuration................................................................................................................................................ ................................................... 134 3.11.7 Portal Configuration..................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 134 3.11.8 DDNS Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 135 3.11.9 IGMP Configuration..............................................................................................................................................136 3.11.10 Intelligent Intelligent Channel Configuration................................................................................................................... Configuration....................................................................................................................... .... 137 3.11.11 Terminal Terminal Limit Configuration..............................................................................................................................140 3.11.12 ARP Ping........................................................................................ Ping............................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 140 3.11.13 DNS Configuration..............................................................................................................................................141 3.11.14 ARP Aging...........................................................................................................................................................141 3.11.15 DSCP-to-Pbit DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping........................................................................................................................................142 3.12 Voice......................................................................................................... Voice......................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 143 3.12.1 VoIP Basic Basic Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................143 143 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 3.12.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration...................................................................... Configuration...............................................................................................................................149 .........................................................149 3.12.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion............................................................................................................................ Conversion............................................................................................................................ 160 3.13 System To Tools............................................................................................................. ols.............................................................................................................................................................160 ................................................160 3.13.1 Reboot................................................................................. Reboot....................................................................................................................................................................160 ...................................................................................160 3.13.2 Configuration File................................................................................................. File..................................................................................................................................................161 .................................................161 3.13.3 Firmware Firmware Upgrade................................................................................................................................................. Upgrade.................................................................................................................................................161 161 3.13.4 Restore Default Configuration............................................................................ Configuration...............................................................................................................................162 ...................................................162 3.13.5 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................................162 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................................162 3.13.6 VoIP Statistics........................................................................................................................................................163 Statistics........................................................................................................................................................163 3.13.7 VoIP Diagnose....................................................................................... Diagnose....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 163 3.13.8 Remote Remote Mirror............................................................................................................................................... Mirror....................................................................................................................................................... ........ 164 3.13.9 User Log................................................................................... Log................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................. 165 3.13.10 Debug Debug Log................................................................................................................................................... Log.......................................................................................................................................................... ....... 166 3.13.11 Firewall Firewall Log............................................................................................ Log.........................................................................................................................................................167 .............................................................167 3.13.12 ONT Authentication.............................................................. Authentication............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................. 167 3.13.13 Time Setting.........................................................................................................................................................168 3.13.14 TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................169 TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................169 3.13.15 Advanced Advanced Power Management............................................................................................................................171 3.13.16 Modify Login Password........................................................................................................... Password...................................................................................................................................... ........................... 172 3.13.17 Intelligent Intelligent Channel Statistics............................................................................................................................... Statistics............................................................................................................................... 172 3.13.18 Fault Info Collect................................................................................................................................................. Collect.................................................................................................................................................173 173 3.13.19 Indicator Status Management.............................................................................................................................. Management.............................................................................................................................. 173 3.13.20 One-Click Diagnosis........................................................................................... Diagnosis............................................................................................................................................174 .................................................174 3.13.21 Open Source Software Software Notice............................................................................................................................. Notice............................................................................................................................. 175 3.14 Bundle................................................................... Bundle.......................................................................................................................................................................176 ....................................................................................................176 3.14.1 Bundle Information.............................................................................................. Information................................................................................................................................................176 ..................................................176 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q)............................................. HN8245Q)................................................................... ........................... ..... 177 4.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface....................................................................................................................178 Interface....................................................................................................................178 4.2 Fast Setting...................................................................................... Setting................................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... 181 4.3 Home Page..................................................................................................................................................................181 Page..................................................................................................................................................................181 4.4 One-click Diagnosis................................................................................................... Diagnosis................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 181 4.5 System Info.................................................................................................................................................................182 Info.................................................................................................................................................................182 4.5.1 Device Information..................................................................................................................................................183 Information..................................................................................................................................................183 4.5.2 WAN Information........................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 183 4.5.3 Optical Information................................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 184 4.5.4 Service Provisioning Status..................................................................................................................................... Status.....................................................................................................................................185 185 4.5.5 VoIP Information..................................................................................... ormation..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 185 4.5.6 Eth Port Information................................................................................................................................................186 4.5.7 WLAN Information..................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 187 4.5.8 Home Network Network Information..................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 187 4.5.9 Cloud Platform Platform Status..............................................................................................................................................188 4.6 Advanced Configuration......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................................188 ....................................................................188 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents Configuration.................................................................................................................................................189 ....................................................................189 4.6.1 WAN Configuration............................................................................. 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration..............................................................................................................................................189 ....................................................................189 4.6.2 LAN Configuration................................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................................................197 ..................................................................197 4.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration............................................................................ Configuration................................................................................................................................197 ....................................................197 4.6.2.2 LAN Host Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................197 197 4.6.2.3 DHCP Server Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration.................................................................................................................................198 ...................................................198 4.6.2.4 DHCP Static IP Configuration............................................................................................................................. Configuration............................................................................................................................. 201 4.6.2.5 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................202 ...................................................202 4.6.2.6 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration......................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................... 204 4.6.2.7 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Information............................................................................................. Information........................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 204 4.6.3 Security Configuration............................................................................ Configuration............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 205 4.6.3.1 IPv4 Firewall Firewall Level Configuration.......................................................................................................................205 4.6.3.2 DoS Configuration................................................................................................................................................205 Configuration................................................................................................................................................205 4.6.3.3 IPv4 Address Address Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 206 4.6.3.4 MAC Address Filtering.............................................................................................. Filtering........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 209 4.6.3.5 Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering..............................................................................................................................210 4.6.3.6 Parental Parental Control.................................................................................................................................................... Control.................................................................................................................................................... 211 4.6.3.7 Precise Precise Device Access Control.............................................................................................................................212 4.6.3.8 Device Device Access Control.......................................................................................... Control......................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 213 4.6.3.9 WAN Access Control Configuration.................................................................................................................... Configuration.................................................................................................................... 214 4.6.4 Route........................................................................................................................................................................215 Route........................................................................................................................................................................215 4.6.4.1 Default Default IPv4 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................215 4.6.4.2 IPv4 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................216 .................................................216 4.6.4.3 IPv4 Dynamic Dynamic Route Configuration..................................................................................................................... Configuration.....................................................................................................................217 217 4.6.4.4 IPv4 VLAN VLAN Binding Configuration............................................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................... ......................... 218 4.6.4.5 IPv4 Service Service Route Configuration........................................................................................................................219 4.6.4.6 IPv4 Routing Table............................................................................................................................................... Table...............................................................................................................................................220 220 4.6.4.7 Default Default IPv6 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................220 4.6.4.8 IPv6 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................221 .................................................221 4.6.5 Forward Rules........................................................................................ Rules..........................................................................................................................................................221 ..................................................................221 4.6.5.1 DMZ Function............................................................................. Function...................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 221 4.6.5.2 IPv4 Port Port Mapping................................................................................ Mapping................................................................................................................................................223 ................................................................223 4.6.5.3 Port Trigger Trigger Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 225 4.6.6 Application................................................................................................ Application.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 227 4.6.6.1 Time Setting..........................................................................................................................................................227 4.6.6.2 Media Sharing..................................................................................... Sharing.......................................................................................................................................................228 ..................................................................228 4.6.6.3 ALG Configuration...............................................................................................................................................228 4.6.6.4 DDNS Function......................................... Function.............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................... ...... 229 4.6.6.5 UPnP Function......................................................................................................................................................230 4.6.6.6 IGMP Configuration............................................................................................................................................ Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 231 4.6.6.7 Intelligent Intelligent Channel Configuration........................................................................................................................ Configuration........................................................................................................................232 232 4.6.6.8 Static DNS................................................................................... DNS............................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 235 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 4.6.6.9 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping........................................................................................... Mapping.........................................................................................................................................236 ..............................................236 4.6.7 WLAN.......................................................................................................................... WLAN..................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 236 4.6.7.1 2.4G Basic Network Settings................................................................................................................................236 4.6.7.2 2.4G Advanced Network Settings........................................................................................................................ Settings........................................................................................................................ 239 4.6.7.3 5G Basic Network Settings...................................................................................................................................240 4.6.7.4 5G Advanced Advanced Network Settings................................................................................................ Settings........................................................................................................................... ........................... 243 4.6.7.5 Automatic Automatic WiFi Shutdown................................................................................................................................... Shutdown................................................................................................................................... 244 4.6.7.6 WiFi Coverage Coverage Management................................................................................................................................ Management................................................................................................................................245 245 4.6.8 Voice........................................................................................................ Voice........................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 247 4.6.8.1 VoIP Basic Basic Configuration..................................................................................................................................... Configuration.....................................................................................................................................247 247 4.6.8.2 VoIP Advanced Advanced Configuration..................................................................... Configuration..............................................................................................................................252 .........................................................252 4.6.8.3 SIP/H.248 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion............................................................................... Conversion........................................................................................................................... ............................................ 261 4.6.9 System Management................................................................................................................................................262 4.6.9.1 TR-069..................................................................................................................................................................262 TR-069..................................................................................................................................................................262 4.6.9.2 Account Account Management........................................................................................................................................... Management...........................................................................................................................................265 265 4.6.9.3 Open Source Software Notice............................................................................. Notice.............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 265 4.6.9.4 ONT Authentication............................................................... Authentication............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................. 266 4.6.10 Maintenance Diagnose........................................................................ Diagnose.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 267 4.6.10.1 Software Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... 267 4.6.10.2 Configuration File Management.................................................................... Management.........................................................................................................................267 .....................................................267 4.6.10.3 Maintenance................................................................... Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................268 .....................................................................................268 4.6.10.4 User Log.................................................................................................................. Log............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 269 4.6.10.5 Firewall Log....................................................................................... Log....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 270 4.6.10.6 Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................................... Log.......................................................................................................................................................... 271 4.6.10.7 Intelligent Channel Statistics.............................................................................................................................. Statistics..............................................................................................................................272 272 4.6.10.8 Fault Info Collect................................................................................................................................................273 4.6.10.9 Remote Mirror............................................................................................................................................ Mirror.................................................................................................................................................... ........ 273 4.6.10.10 VoIP Statistics................................................................................................................................................... Statistics...................................................................................................................................................274 274 4.6.11 Bundle.................................................................................................................................................................... Bundle....................................................................................................................................................................275 275 4.6.11.1 Bundle Information............................................................................. Inf ormation.............................................................................................................................................275 ................................................................275 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q).......... EG8247Q)................................ ............................................ ..........................................276 ....................276 5.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface....................................................................................................................276 Interface....................................................................................................................276 5.2 Fast Setting...................................................................................... Setting................................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... 279 5.3 Home Page..................................................................................................................................................................279 Page..................................................................................................................................................................279 5.4 One-click Diagnosis................................................................................................... Diagnosis................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 279 5.5 System Information...................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 280 5.5.1 Device Information..................................................................................................................................................280 Information..................................................................................................................................................280 5.5.2 WAN Information........................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 281 5.5.3 Optical Information................................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 282 5.5.4 Service Provisioning Status..................................................................................................................................... Status.....................................................................................................................................283 283 5.5.5 VoIP Information..................................................................................... ormation..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 283 5.5.6 Eth Port Information................................................................................................................................................284 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 5.5.7 WLAN Information................................................................................................................................................. Information................................................................................................................................................. 285 5.5.8 Home Network Network Information.................................................................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................... 287 5.6 Advanced Configuration......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................................287 ....................................................................287 5.6.1 WAN Configuration............................................................................. Configuration.................................................................................................................................................287 ....................................................................287 5.6.1.1 WAN Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration..............................................................................................................................................287 ....................................................................287 5.6.2 LAN Configuration..................................................................................................................................................296 Configuration..................................................................................................................................................296 5.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration............................................................................ Configuration................................................................................................................................296 ....................................................296 5.6.2.2 LAN Host Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................296 296 5.6.2.3 DHCP Server Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration.................................................................................................................................297 ...................................................297 5.6.2.4 DHCP Static IP Configuration............................................................................................................................. Configuration............................................................................................................................. 300 5.6.2.5 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................300 ...................................................300 5.6.2.6 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration......................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................... 303 5.6.2.7 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Information............................................................................................. Information........................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 303 5.6.2.8 LAN Host Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................304 304 5.6.3 Security Configuration............................................................................ Configuration............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 304 5.6.3.1 IPv4 Firewall Firewall Level Configuration.......................................................................................................................304 5.6.3.2 IPv4 Address Address Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 305 5.6.3.3 MAC Address Filtering.............................................................................................. Filtering........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 307 5.6.3.4 Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering..............................................................................................................................308 5.6.3.5 Parental Parental Control.................................................................................................................................................... Control....................................................................................................................................................309 309 5.6.3.6 Precise Precise Device Access Control.............................................................................................................................310 5.6.4 Route........................................................................................................................................................................310 Route........................................................................................................................................................................310 5.6.4.1 Default Default IPv4 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................310 5.6.4.2 IPv4 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................311 .................................................311 5.6.4.3 IPv4 Dynamic Dynamic Route Configuration..................................................................................................................... Configuration.....................................................................................................................312 312 5.6.4.4 IPv4 VLAN VLAN Binding Configuration............................................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................... ......................... 313 5.6.4.5 IPv4 Service Service Route Configuration........................................................................................................................314 5.6.4.6 IPv4 Routing Table............................................................................................................................................... Table...............................................................................................................................................315 315 5.6.4.7 Default Default IPv6 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................315 5.6.4.8 IPv6 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................315 .................................................315 5.6.5 Forward Rules........................................................................................ Rules..........................................................................................................................................................316 ..................................................................316 5.6.5.1 DMZ Function............................................................................. Function...................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 316 5.6.5.2 IPv4 Port Port Mapping................................................................................ Mapping................................................................................................................................................317 ................................................................317 5.6.5.3 Port Trigger Trigger Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 320 5.6.6 Application................................................................................................ Application.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 321 5.6.6.1 Time Setting..........................................................................................................................................................321 5.6.6.2 Media Sharing..................................................................................... Sharing.......................................................................................................................................................323 ..................................................................323 5.6.6.3 ALG Configuration...............................................................................................................................................323 5.6.6.4 DDNS Function......................................... Function.............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................... ...... 324 5.6.6.5 UPnP Function......................................................................................................................................................325 5.6.6.6 IGMP Configuration............................................................................................................................................ Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 326 5.6.6.7 Intelligent Intelligent Channel Configuration........................................................................................................................ Configuration........................................................................................................................327 327 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 5.6.6.8 Video Configuration.......................................................................................................... 330 Video Device Identification Configuration.......................................................................................................... 5.6.6.9 Static DNS............................................................................................................................................................ DNS............................................................................................................................................................ 330 5.6.6.10 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping......................................................................................... Mapping.......................................................................................................................................331 ..............................................331 5.6.7 WLAN.......................................................................................................................... WLAN..................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 332 5.6.7.1 WLAN Basic Configuration.................................................................................................................................332 5.6.7.2 WLAN Advanced Configuration..........................................................................................................................334 Configuration..........................................................................................................................334 5.6.7.3 2.4G Basic Basic Network Settings................................................................................................ Settings................................................................................................................................336 ................................336 5.6.7.4 2.4G Advanced Advanced Network Settings............................................................................................. Settings........................................................................................................................ ........................... 339 5.6.7.5 5G Basic Basic Network Settings................................................................................................... Settings...................................................................................................................................340 ................................340 5.6.7.6 5G Advanced Advanced Network Settings................................................................................................ Settings........................................................................................................................... ........................... 343 5.6.7.7 Automatic Automatic WiFi Shutdown................................................................................................................................... Shutdown................................................................................................................................... 344 5.6.7.8 WiFi Coverage Coverage Management................................................................................................................................ Management................................................................................................................................345 345 5.6.8 Voice....................................................................................... oice........................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. 346 5.6.8.1 VoIP VoIP Basic Configuration........................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................346 346 5.6.8.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration..................................................................... Configuration..............................................................................................................................352 .........................................................352 5.6.8.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion........................................................................................................................... Conversion........................................................................................................................... 361 5.6.9 System Management............................................................ Management................................................................................................................................................362 ....................................................................................362 5.6.9.1 TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................. TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................. 362 5.6.9.2 Account Management........................................................................................................................................... Management...........................................................................................................................................365 365 5.6.9.3 Open Source Software Software Notice.............................................................................................................................. Notice.............................................................................................................................. 365 5.6.9.4 ONT Authentication.................................................................................................................. Authentication............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 366 5.6.10 Maintenance Diagnose........................................................................ Diagnose.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 367 5.6.10.1 Software Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... 367 5.6.10.2 Configuration File Management.................................................................... Management.........................................................................................................................367 .....................................................367 5.6.10.3 Upstream Port Configuration............................................................................ Configuration..............................................................................................................................368 ..................................................368 5.6.10.4 Maintenance................................................................... Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................368 .....................................................................................368 5.6.10.5 User Log.................................................................................................................. Log............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 369 5.6.10.6 Firewall Log....................................................................................... Log....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 370 5.6.10.7 Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................................... Log.......................................................................................................................................................... 371 5.6.10.8 Intelligent Channel Statistics.............................................................................................................................. Statistics..............................................................................................................................372 372 5.6.10.9 Fault Info Collect................................................................................................................................................373 5.6.10.10 Remote Mirror.......................................................................................................................................... Mirror.................................................................................................................................................. ........ 373 5.6.10.11 Home Network Network Speedtest................................................................................................................................. Speedtest................................................................................................................................. 374 5.6.10.12 Segment Speedtest............................................................................................................................................ Speedtest............................................................................................................................................ 375 5.6.10.13 VoIP Statistics................................................................................................................................................... Statistics...................................................................................................................................................375 375 6 Web Page Reference (EG8145V5, EG8245H5, EG8247H5, EG8141A5,EG8245W5,EG8 ,EG8245W5,EG8143A5,EG8120 143A5,EG8120L5,EG8040F5).... L5,EG8040F5).......................... ............................................ ............................. ....... 377 6.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface....................................................................................................................377 Interface....................................................................................................................377 6.2 Fast Setting...................................................................................... Setting................................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... 381 6.3 Home Page..................................................................................................................................................................381 Page..................................................................................................................................................................381 6.4 One-click Diagnosis................................................................................................... Diagnosis................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 381 6.5 System Information...................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 382 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 6.5.1 Device Information..................................................................................................................................................383 6.5.2 WAN Information.................................................................................................................................................... Information....................................................................................................................................................383 383 6.5.3 Optical Information................................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 384 6.5.4 Service Provisioning Status..................................................................................................................................... Status..................................................................................................................................... 385 6.5.5 VoIP VoIP Information..................................................................................................................................................... 385 6.5.6 Eth Port Information................................................................................................................................................386 6.5.7 WLAN Information..................................................................................... Information................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 387 6.5.8 Home Network Network Information..................................................................................... Information.................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 389 6.6 Advanced Configuration......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................................389 ....................................................................389 6.6.1 WAN Configuration.................................................................................................................................................389 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................389 6.6.1.1 WAN Configuration..............................................................................................................................................389 6.6.2 LAN Configuration..................................................................................................................................................398 Configuration..................................................................................................................................................398 6.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration............................................................................ Configuration................................................................................................................................398 ....................................................398 6.6.2.2 LAN Host Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................398 398 6.6.2.3 DHCP Server Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration.................................................................................................................................399 ...................................................399 6.6.2.4 DHCP Static IP Configuration............................................................................................................................. Configuration............................................................................................................................. 402 6.6.2.5 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration.............................................................................................................................402 ...................................................402 6.6.2.6 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration......................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................... 405 6.6.2.7 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Information............................................................................................. Information........................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 405 6.6.2.8 LAN Host Configuration...................................................................................................................................... Configuration......................................................................................................................................406 406 6.6.3 Security Configuration............................................................................ Configuration............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 406 6.6.3.1 IPv4 Firewall Firewall Level Configuration.......................................................................................................................406 6.6.3.2 IPv4 Address Address Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 407 6.6.3.3 MAC Address Filtering.............................................................................................. Filtering........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 409 6.6.3.4 Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering..............................................................................................................................410 6.6.3.5 Parental Parental Control.................................................................................................................................................... Control.................................................................................................................................................... 411 6.6.3.6 Precise Precise Device Access Control.............................................................................................................................412 6.6.4 Route........................................................................................................................................................................412 Route........................................................................................................................................................................412 6.6.4.1 Default Default IPv4 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................412 6.6.4.2 IPv4 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................413 .................................................413 6.6.4.3 IPv4 Dynamic Dynamic Route Configuration..................................................................................................................... Configuration.....................................................................................................................414 414 6.6.4.4 IPv4 VLAN VLAN Binding Configuration............................................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................... ......................... 415 6.6.4.5 IPv4 Service Service Route Configuration........................................................................................................................416 6.6.4.6 IPv4 Routing Table............................................................................................................................................... Table...............................................................................................................................................417 417 6.6.4.7 Default Default IPv6 Route Configuration........................................................................................................................417 6.6.4.8 IPv6 Static Static Route Configuration.......................................................................... Configuration...........................................................................................................................417 .................................................417 6.6.5 Forward Rules........................................................................................ Rules..........................................................................................................................................................418 ..................................................................418 6.6.5.1 DMZ Function............................................................................. Function...................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 418 6.6.5.2 IPv4 Port Port Mapping................................................................................ Mapping................................................................................................................................................420 ................................................................420 6.6.5.3 Port Trigger Trigger Configuration.............................................................................. Configuration................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 422 6.6.6 Application................................................................................................ Application.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 423 6.6.6.1 Time Setting..........................................................................................................................................................423 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 6.6.6.2 Media Sharing..................................................................................... Sharing.......................................................................................................................................................425 ..................................................................425 6.6.6.3 ALG Configuration............................................................................. Configuration...............................................................................................................................................425 ..................................................................425 6.6.6.4 DDNS Function.................................................................................................................................................... Function.................................................................................................................................................... 426 6.6.6.5 UPnP Function..................................................................................... Function......................................................................................................................................................427 .................................................................427 6.6.6.6 IGMP Configuration............................................................................................................................................. Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 428 6.6.6.7 Intelligent Intelligent Channel Configuration........................................................................................................................ Configuration........................................................................................................................429 429 6.6.6.8 Video Video Device Identification Configuration.......................................................................................................... Configuration.......................................................................................................... 432 6.6.6.9 Static DNS............................................................................................................................................................ DNS............................................................................................................................................................ 432 6.6.6.10 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping......................................................................................... Mapping.......................................................................................................................................433 ..............................................433 6.6.7 WLAN.......................................................................................................................... WLAN..................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 434 6.6.7.1 WLAN Basic Configuration.................................................................................................................................434 6.6.7.2 WLAN Advanced Configuration...................................................................... Configuration..........................................................................................................................436 ....................................................436 6.6.7.3 2.4G Basic Network Settings................................................................................................................................438 6.6.7.4 2.4G Advanced Network Settings........................................................................................................................ Settings........................................................................................................................ 441 6.6.7.5 5G Basic Network Settings...................................................................................................................................442 6.6.7.6 5G Advanced Network Settings........................................................................................................................... Settings........................................................................................................................... 445 6.6.7.7 Automatic WiFi Shutdown................................................................................................................................... Shutdown................................................................................................................................... 446 6.6.7.8 WiFi Coverage Management................................................................................................................................ Management................................................................................................................................ 447 6.6.8 Voice....................................................................................... oice........................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. 448 6.6.8.1 VoIP VoIP Basic Configuration........................................................................ Configuration..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................448 448 6.6.8.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration1................................................................... Configuration1............................................................................................................................454 .........................................................454 6.6.8.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion........................................................................................................................... Conversion........................................................................................................................... 463 6.6.9 System Management............................................................ Management................................................................................................................................................464 ....................................................................................464 6.6.9.1 TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................. TR-069.................................................................................................................................................................. 464 6.6.9.2 Account Management........................................................................................................................................... Management...........................................................................................................................................467 467 6.6.9.3 Open Source Software Software Notice.............................................................................................................................. Notice.............................................................................................................................. 467 6.6.9.4 ONT Authentication.................................................................................................................. Authentication............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 468 6.6.10 Maintenance Diagnose........................................................................ Diagnose.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................. 469 6.6.10.1 Software Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... 469 6.6.10.2 Configuration File Management.................................................................... Management.........................................................................................................................469 .....................................................469 6.6.10.3 Upstream Port Configuration............................................................................ Configuration..............................................................................................................................470 ..................................................470 6.6.10.4 Maintenance................................................................... Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................470 .....................................................................................470 6.6.10.5 User Log.................................................................................................................. Log............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 471 6.6.10.6 Firewall Log....................................................................................... Log....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 472 6.6.10.7 Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................................... Log.......................................................................................................................................................... 473 6.6.10.8 Intelligent Channel Statistics.............................................................................................................................. Statistics..............................................................................................................................474 474 6.6.10.9 Fault Info Collect................................................................................................................................................475 6.6.10.10 Remote Mirror.......................................................................................................................................... Mirror.................................................................................................................................................. ........ 475 6.6.10.11 Home Network Network Speedtest................................................................................................................................. Speedtest................................................................................................................................. 476 6.6.10.12 Segment Speedtest............................................................................................................................................ Speedtest............................................................................................................................................ 477 6.6.10.13 VoIP Statistics................................................................................................................................................... Statistics...................................................................................................................................................477 477 7 Appendix.................. Appendix........................................ ............................................ ............................................. ............................................. ............................................ .......................... .... 479 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Contents 7.1 Reference of GPON ONT Capability Sets................................................................................................................. Sets................................................................................................................. 479 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 1 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) This topic describes the usage and meanings of the parameters on the web page. Before configuring and viewing the parameters on the web page, log in to the web page. For details about how to log in to the web page, see 1.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface. The web page of HG8010H/HG8040H/HG8012H/EG8010H/EG8040H/EG8040H5 HG8010H/HG8040H/HG8012H/EG8010H/EG8040H/EG8040H5 slightly varies according to the capability sets of the LAN ports on ONTs. W Web eb pages related to LAN port capability sets also vary vary.. NOTE This topic uses the login web page of the administrator user (telecomadmin) on HG8010H as an example for easy description. Practical web pages prevail. The configuration window for an administrator is different from that for a common user. l l Compared with a common user, an administrator has permissions to view and configure all parameters on the web page. A common user can configure and query some nodes and parameters and the queried information is less than that queried by an administrator. administrator. This topic lists different nodes queried by a common user. For details, see the web page for a common common use user. r. A common user does not have permissions to view the following parameters: – Firmware Upgrade, Maintenance and Fault Info Collect under the System Tools node 1.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface This topic describes the data plan and procedure for logging in to the web configuration interface. Context Before setting up the configuration environment, ensure that data information listed in Table 1-1 is available. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 1-1 1 -1 Data plan Item Description User name and password Default settings: l Administrator (installation and maintenance personnel): HG Series: – – User name: telecomadmin Password: admintelecom EG Series: – User name: Epadmin – Password: adminEp NOTE l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times within five minutes the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the NMS. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr corresponding esponding ISP. ISP. CAUTION l l Please change the initial password to ensure administrator account security. l Do not provide terminal users with the password of the administrator account. The administrator account is used by the ISP for O&M. If a terminal user uses the administrator account, service parameters may be incorrectly incorrectly modified and service servicess may be affected. affected. Common user (terminal user): HG Series: – User name: root – Password: adminHW EG Series: Issue 01 (2019-09-20) – User name: Epuser – Password: userEp Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Item Description NOTE l The common user account can be used to query the service status. For ONTs that support Wi-Fi and the USB storage function, the common user account can be used to configure services such as Wi-Fi and home sharing. l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the Web. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr corresponding esponding ISP. ISP. CAUTION Change the initial password after common users log in to the web page. LAN IP address and subnet mask Default settings: l HG Series: – – l IP address and subnet mask of the PC IP address: 192.168.100.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 EG Series: – IP address: 192.168.18.1 – Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as the LAN IP address of the ONT. For example: l IP address: 192.168.100.100 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Procedure Step 1 Use a network cable to connect the LAN port of the ONT to a PC. Step 2 Ensure that the Internet Explorer (IE) of the PC does not use the proxy server. The following section considers IE 8.0 as an example to describe how to check whether the IE uses the proxy server. server. 1. Star Startt the the IE, IE, an and d ch choo oose se Tools > Internet Options from the main menu of the IE window. Then, the Internet Options interface is displayed. 2. In the Internet Options interface, click the Connections tab, and then click LAN settings. 3. In the Proxy server area, ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). check box is not selected (that is, without the "√" sign). If the check box is selected, deselect it, and then click OK. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Step 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. For details, see Table 1-1. Step 4 Log in to the Web Web configuration interface. 1. Enter http://192.168.100.1 in the address bar of IE (192.168.100.1 is the default IP address of the ONT), and then press Enter to display the login interface, as shown in Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Login interface NOTE The web page login supports SSL3.0, TLS1.0, TLS1.1, and TLS1.2. It is recommended that you use high-security TLS1.1 or TLS1.2 if you log in to the ONT using https. The TCP port 80 is used for listening for HTTPS packets. You need to type "https://192.168.100.1:80" in the address bar of IE and press Enter to log in to the ONT. 2. In the login interface interface,, ente enterr the use name name and and password password.. For detail detailss about about default default settings settings of the user name and password, see Table 1-1. After the password authentication is passed, the Web Web configuration interface interface is displayed. ----End 1.2 Status This topic describes how to query the information about the t he ONT, ONT, including ETH port information, optical information, and user device information through the web page. 1.2.1 Eth Port Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Eth Port Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the duplex mode, speed, and status of the ETH port, as shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2 Eth Port Information 1.2.2 Optical Information NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Optical Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the optical status, transmit optical power and receive optical power of the optical module, as shown in Figure 1-3. Figure 1-3 Optical Information 1.2.3 Device Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Device Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the product name, hardware version, and software version, as shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Device Information Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.2.4 Service Provisioning Status NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. Click the Status tab, and choose Service Provisioning Status from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, the ONT service provisioning status is displayed, as shown in Figure 1-5. Figure 1-5 Service provisioning status 1.3 LAN This topic describes how to configure the LAN port through t hrough the web page. 1.3.1 LAN Host Configuration Configuration 1. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se LAN > LAN Host Configuration. In the pane on the right, set the management IP address of the LAN host and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 LAN host configuration NOTE The IP address of the device connected to the LAN port must be in the same subnet as the management IP address. In this way, you can access an ONT through the Web page and perform the query and management. 2. Click Apply. 1.4 Security This topic describes how to configure the security through the web page Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.4.1 MAC Filter Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > MAC Filter Configuration. In the pane on the right, after after enabling MAC filter and and selecting the filter mode, mode, click New. On the dialog box that is displayed, configure the MAC filter rule for the PC to access the Internet, as shown in Figure 1-7. Figure 1-7 MAC Filter Configuration 2. Click Apply. The MAC address lists of PCs in the network are saved on the ONT. Configuring MAC filter rules enables the PCs that conform to the rules to access the Internet service or disables the PCs that do not conform to the rules to access the Internet service. A PC may have more than one IP addresses but a unique MAC address. Therefore, configuring MAC filter rules effectively controls the Internet service access access rights of PCs in a LAN. Table 1-2 1 -2 describes the parameters related to the MAC filter. Table 1-2 1 -2 Parameters related to the MAC address filter Parameter Description Enable MAC filter Indicates whether to enable the MAC address filter function. Filt Filter er Mo Mode de In Indi dica cate tess the the MAC MAC add addre ress ss fi filt lter er rule rule of th thee bla black ckli list st or whit whitel elis ist. t. l l Blacklist: indicatestothat the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed pass. Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is allowed to pass. The filter mode is global config mode. Thus, the blacklist and whitelist mode cannot be used at the same time. Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC address filter rule. 1.5 System Tools This topic describes how to use the system tools on the web page, including using the tools to restart the device, and restore the default configuration. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.5.1 Reboot In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Reboot. In the pane on the right, click Reboot to restart the device, as shown in i n Figure 1-8. Figure 1-8 Reboot Save the configuration data before restarting the device. For details, see 1.5.2 Configuration File. 1.5.2 Configuration File In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Configuration File. In the pane on the right, click the button as required as shown in Figure 1-9. Figure 1-9 Configuration File l Click Save to save the configuration file to the flash memory. This prevents data loss due to the restart of the device. l Click Save and Restart to save the configuration file and reboot the ONT. l Click Download Configuration File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the configuration file, and then back up the file to the local disk. l Click Browse following the Configuration File text box. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the configuration file to be uploaded. Click Update Configuration File to upload the configuration file that is saved in the local disk. After the configuration file is successfully uploaded, the device automatically restarts and then the new configuration takes effect. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Before uploading the configuration file, choose the configuration file with the correct type and the name of the selected configuration file must not be the same as that of any file saved in the device. Otherwise, the configuration file fails to be uploaded. When IE8 is used for configuration file downloading and you click the t he save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded configuration file is incomplete. 1.5.3 Firmware Upgrade NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Firmware Upgrade. In the pane on the right, click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the target software version of the device. Click Update Firmware to upgrade the software of the device, as shown in Figure 1-10. Figure 1-10 Firmware Upgrade 2. After the up upgrad gradee is su succes ccessful, sful, a message message is is displayed displayed indicating indicating that that the device device needs needs to be reset. Click Restart. The configuration data takes effect after the device is reset. 1.5.4 Restore Default Configuration In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Restore Default Configuration. In the pane on the right, click Default to restore the factory defaults, as shown in Figure 1-11. Figure 1-11 Restore Default Configuration Exercise caution when you perform this operation because it restores factory defaults. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.5.5 Maintenance In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Maintenance. 1. In the the pan panee on on the the righ right, t, clic click k Start Hardware Fault Detection to start hardware fault detection, as shown in Figure 1-12. Figure 1-12 Maintenance 1.5.6 Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 1-13. Figure 1-13 Log Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) l You cannot configure Log Level, which indicates the level of the saved log. The log whose level is equal to or higher than the debug-level log is saved. l Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 1.5.7 ONT Authentication 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > ONT Authentication Authentication. In the pane on the right, you can can view or change the authentication mode for for the registration of the ONT on the OLT, as shown in Figure 1-14 and Figure 1-15. Figure 1-14 ONT authentication (administrator) NOTE There are 2 modes for ONT authentication: LOID and Password. l When Authentication Mode is LOID, you can query and change the LOID and Password of an ONT. l When Authentication Mode is Password, you can query and change the Password Mode, Password, and SN of an ONT. An administrator can change the password of an online ONT. If this ONT authentication mode is password and you change its password, this ONT goes offline. Figure 1-15 ONT authentication (common user) NOTE A common user cannot change the password of an online ONT. 2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.5.8 Advanced Power Management 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Advanced Power Management . In the pane on the right, you can start the ONT energy saving, as shown in Figure 1-16. Figure 1-16 Advanced Power Management 2. Click Apply. 1.5.9 Modify Login Password 1. Click the System Tools tab and then choose Modify Login Password from the navigation tree. In the right pane, change the password of the root user, as shown in Figure 1-17. Figure 1-17 Modify Login Password NOTE 2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) l After the user logs in to the ONT Web interface using the default common user name and password,, the Modify Login Password interface is automatically displayed, prompting the password user to change the initial password. After the user successfully changes the password, the Modify Login Password interface is no longer displayed in the following logins. l Change the initial user name and password after logging in to the web page. Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 1.5.10 Fault Info Collect Click the System Tools tab, and choose Fault Info Collect from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click Start to collect ONT fault information, as shown in Figure 1-18. Figure 1-18 Fault information collection NOTE After the information is collected, click Download to download the collected information to a local directory. When IE8 is used for fault info collect and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the fault info collect is incomplet incomplete. e. 1.5.11 Indicator Status Management 1. Click System Tools. On the navigation tree, choose Indicator Status Managemen Managementt. In the right pane, you can set the indicator switch and disabling time segment, as shown in Figure 1-19. Figure 1-19 Indicator status management NOTE If both Global indicator disabling time segment and Customized indicator disabling time segment are configured, Customized indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is selected for Customized indicator disabling time segment, and Global indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is not selected. 2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1 Web Page Reference (HG8010H, HG8040H, HG8012H, EG8010H, EG8040H, EG8040H5) 1.5.12 Open Source Software Notice In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Open Source Software Notice. In the pane on the right, you can view the open source software notice for the product, as shown in Figure 1-20. Figure 1-20 Open source software notice Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) This topic describes the usage and meanings of the parameters on the web page. Before configuring and viewing the parameters on the web page, log in to the web page. For details about how to log in to the web page, see 2.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface. The web page of HG8110H/HG8240H/HG8242H/EG HG8110H/HG8240H/HG8242H/EG8240H/EG8240H5/HG8240 8240H/EG8240H5/HG8240u/EG8242H u/EG8242H slightly varies according to the capability sets of the LAN ports and POTS ports on ONTs. Web pages related to LAN/POTS port capability sets also vary. NOTE This topic uses the login web page of the administrator user (telecomadmin) on HG8240H as an example for easy description. Practical web pages prevail. Because different voice protocols, the Voice node contains different parameters. parameters. Only one of the SIP and H.248 protocols can be supported at a time. Which protocol is supported depends on the ONT used. used. The configuration window for an administrator is different from that for a common user. l Compared with a common user, an administrator has permissions to view and configure all parameters on the web page. A common user can configure and query some nodes and parameters and the queried information is less than that queried by an administrator. administrator. This topic lists different nodes queried by a common user. For details, see the web page for a common user. l A common user does not have permissions to view the following parameters: – Remote Management under the Status node – DoS Configuration, Device Access Control and WAN Access Control Configuration under the Security node – Network Applications node – The Voice node – Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Firmware Upgrade, VoIP Diagnose VoIP Statistics Mirror, Debug , Remote and Fault, Info the System log, Time Setting, TR-069 Collect under Tools node Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) 2.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface This topic describes the data plan and procedure for logging in to the web configuration interface. Context Before setting up the configuration environment, ensure that data information listed in Table 2-1 is available. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 2-1 2 -1 Data plan Item Description User name and password Default settings: l Administrator (installation and maintenance personnel): HG Series: – – User name: telecomadmin Password: admintelecom EG Series: – User name: Epadmin – Password: adminEp NOTE l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times within five minutes the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the NMS. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr corresponding esponding ISP. ISP. CAUTION l l Please change the initial password to ensure administrator account security. l Do not provide terminal users with the password of the administrator account. The administrator account is used by the ISP for O&M. If a terminal user uses the administrator account, service parameters may be incorrectly incorrectly modified and service servicess may be affected. affected. Common user (terminal user): HG Series: – User name: root – Password: adminHW EG Series: Issue 01 (2019-09-20) – User name: Epuser – Password: userEp Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Item Description NOTE l l The common user account can be used to query the service status. For ONTs that support Wi-Fi and the USB storage function, the common user account can be used to configure services such as Wi-Fi and home sharing. After in to the if youout doand not return perform anytooperations withinlogging five minute, youweb willpage, be locked back the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the Web. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr corresponding esponding ISP. ISP. CAUTION Change the initial password after common users log in to the web page. LAN IP address and subnet mask Default settings: l HG Series: – – l IP address and subnet mask of the PC IP address: 192.168.100.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 EG Series: – IP address: 192.168.18.1 – Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as the LAN IP address of the ONT. For example: l IP address: 192.168.100.100 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Procedure Step 1 Use a network cable to connect the LAN port of the ONT to a PC. Step 2 Ensure that the Internet Explorer (IE) of the PC does not use the proxy server. The following section considers IE 8.0 as an example to describe how to check whether the IE uses the proxy server. server. 1. Star Startt the the IE, IE, an and d ch choo oose se Tools > Internet Options from the main menu of the IE window. Then, the Internet Options interface is displayed. 2. In the Internet Options interface, click the Connections tab, and then click LAN settings. 3. In the Proxy server area, ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). check box is not selected (that is, without the "√" sign). If the check box is selected, deselect it, and then click OK. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Step 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. For details, see Table 2-1. Step 4 Log in to the Web Web configuration interface. 1. Enter http://192.168.*.1 in the address bar of IE (192.168.*.1 is the default IP address of the ONT), and then press Enter to display the login interface, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Login interface NOTE The web page login supports SSL3.0, TLS1.0, TLS1.1, and TLS1.2. It is recommended that you use high-security TLS1.1 or TLS1.2 if you log in to the ONT using https. The TCP port 80 is used for listening for HTTPS packets. You need to type "https://192.168.*.1:80" in the address bar of IE and press Enter to log in to the ONT. 2. In the login interface interface,, ente enterr the use name name and and password password.. For detail detailss about about default default settings settings of the user name and password, see Table 2-1. After the password authentication is passed, the Web Web configuration interface interface is displayed. ----End 2.2 Status This topic describes how to query the information about the ONT ONT,, including ETH port information, optical information, and user device information through the web page. 2.2.1 WAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > WAN Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the status of the WAN WAN interface, mode of obtaining an IP address, IP address, and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 2-2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-2 WAN Information NOTE Click a record in the WAN list, you can view more detailed information by clicking a record in the WAN list. 2 -2 shows the mappings between ONT PPPoE dial-up error messages and Windows Windows Table 2-2 error messages. Table 2-2 2 -2 Mappings between ONT PPPoE dial-up error codes and Windows error codes ONT ON T PPP PPPoE oE Dia Dialu lup p Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Mapp Mappin ing g Wind Window owss Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Link negotiation fails. Error 732: Your computer and the remote computer could not agree on PPP control protocols. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) User name or password authentication fails. Error 691: Access was denied because the user name and/or password was invalid on the domain. The The sseerver ver tteerm rmin inaates tes tthe he ses sessio sion. Erro Errorr 668 668: T The he conne onneccti tion on was te terrmina minate ted. d. The session times out. Error 721: The remote computer did not respond. The system detects that there is no network access request and therefore disconnects the link automatically automatically.. None The user does not enable the device. None Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) ONT ON T PPP PPPoE oE Dia Dialu lup p Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Mapp Mappin ing g Wind Window owss Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e The user does not manually perform a dial. None The device goes offline. None Dialup fails. None 2.2.2 VoIP Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > VoIP Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the information such as user status and call status. The SIP configuration page is slightly different from the H.248 configuration page, as shown in Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4. Figure 2-3 VoIP Information - SIP Figure 2-4 VoIP Information - H.248 If the VoIP service needs to be restarted, click Restart VoIP in the pane on the right. 2.2.3 Eth Port Information Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Eth Port Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the duplex mode, speed, and status of the ETH port, as shown in Figure 2-5. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-5 Eth Port Information 2.2.4 Optical Information NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Optical Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the optical status, transmit optical power and receive optical power of the optical module, as shown in Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 Optical Information 2.2.5 Device Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Device Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the product name, hardware version, and software version, as shown in Figure 2-7. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-7 Device Information 2.2.6 Remote Management Click the Status tab and then choose Remote Manage from the navigation tree. In the right pane, view the remote remote management status and and service application status, status, as shown in Figure 2-8. emote Manage Figure 2-8 Remote 2.2.7 Service Provisioning Status NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. Click the Status tab, and choose Service Provisioning Status from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, the ONT service provisioning status is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-9 Service provisioning status 2.3 WAN This topic describes how to configure the WAN interfac interfacee through the web page. 2.3.1 WAN Configuration l WAN Configuration - route a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se WAN > WAN Configuration. In the pane onAN the, right, clickinNew . In the dialog box that is displayed, set Mode to Route Figure 2-10 . W as shown Figure 2-10 WAN Configuration - route(IPv4) b. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) All data associated with the WAN will be deleted after you delete the WAN port configuration. Exercise caution when you perform this operation. 2 -3 describes the parameters related to the W WAN AN in route mode. Table 2-3 Table 2-3 2 -3 Parameters related to the WAN in route mode Parameter Description Enable WAN Indicates whether to enable the WAN connection. En Enca caps psul ulat atio ion n Mod Modee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he en enca caps psul ulat atio ion n mod modee of of a WAN in inte terf rfac ace. e. It ca can n be be set to IPoE or PPPoE. Protocol Ty Type Indicates tth he protocol tty ype of a WAN iin nterface. It It ccaan be set to to IPv4 WAN Mode Indicates the WAN interface mode. It can be set to Route WAN. Service Type Indicates the service type of the WAN interface. It can be set to TR069, VOIP, TR069_VOIP , Enable VLAN Selects this check box to set VLAN ID and 802.1p priority. VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. It ranges from 1 to 4094. The VLAN ID must be the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT. 802.1p policy Indicates the 802.1p priority policy. l Use specified value: indicates that a specified priority value is used. If you select this option, you need to set the 802.1p parameter.. parameter l Copy from IP precedence: indicates that the priority is copied from the ToS field in the t he IP header of the user-side packets. If the received received packet is not an an IP packet or the packet does not carry carry the 802.1p priority, priority, the default 802.1p priority is used. If you select select this option, you need to set the Default 802.1p parameter. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) MTU Indicates the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IPoE packets. This parameter parameter needs to be set only only when is set to . Encapsulation Mode IPoE MRU Indicates the maximum receive unit (MRU) of PPPoE packets. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. User name Indicates the user name that is used for PPPoE dialup. This user name must be the same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Password Indicates the password that is used for PPPoE dialup. This password must be the same same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. En Enab able le LCP LCP det detec ecti tion on Th This is para paisrame mete terrPPPoE nee needs ds to sett onl only y whe when n Encapsulation set to . be se Mode l If you select this option, the t he LCP detection function is enabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system will detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link normal if the LCP request is detected. l If you do not select this option, the LCP detection function is disabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system does not detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link abnormal. NOTE l WAN in route mode: The ONT functions as a gateway. The IP address of the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, Static, or PPPoE. The IP address of the PC connected to the ONT can be obtained from the DHCP address pool of the ONT or can be set manually. l WAN in bridge mode: The ONT functions as a relay and does not process data. The ONT does not obtain the IP address allocated by the upper-layer device and it does not allow manual configuration of a static IP address. The IP address of the device connected to the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, PPPoE, or static. l In the case of the DHCP mode, you need to set the DHCP relay. After configuration is complete, the user-side IP address is obtained from the upper-layer device. l In the case of the PPPoE mode, the user-side IP address is obtained through PPPoE authentication of the upper-layer device. 2.3.2 DHCP Client Option Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the WAN tab, and choose DHCP Client Option Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the DHCPv4 options carried by the DHCP client for the route WAN, as shown in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11 DHCP client option configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. Click Apply. 2 -4 describes the DHCP client option configuration parameters. Table 2-4 Table 2-4 2 -4 DHCP client option configuration parameters Parameter Description WAN name name Indi Indica cate tess tthe he name name of the the WAN po port to whi hicch the the opti option on to be configured belongs. A maximum of eight options can be configured for each WAN WAN port. Opt ptio ion n IID D Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of a WANN-si side de DHCP DHCP opti option on.. An opti option on ID uniq unique uely ly identifies an option. This parameter cannot be set to Option53 or Option55, which is mandatory in DHCP packets. Opti Op tion on ffor orma matt Indi Indica cate tess the the opt optio ion n ffor orma mat, t, whic which h ccan an be he hexa xade deci cima mall or Ba Base se64 64.. Opti Op tion on valu valuee In Indi dica cate tess tthe he valu valuee o off aan n opt optio ion n ccar arri ried ed in a pac packe kett sen sentt fro from m the the DHCP client to the DHCP server. 2.3.3 DHCP Client Request Parameter Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the WAN tab, and choose DHCP Client Request Parameter from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the request parameter list sent by the DHCP client for the route W WAN. AN. The DHCP server returns the option values based on the request parameter list, as shown in Figure 2-12. Figure 2-12 DHCP client request parameter configuration 2. Click Apply. 2 -5 describes the request parameters sent by the DHCP client. Table 2-5 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 2-5 2 -5 Request parameters sent by the DHCP client Parameter Description WAN name name In Indi dica cate tess the the WAN port port used used for for ttra rans nsmi mitt ttin ing g tthe he re requ ques estt par param amet eter erss sent by the DHCP client. Opt ptio ion n IID D Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of a DH DHCP opt ptio ion. n. An op opti tio on IID D un uniq ique uely ly id ideent ntif ifie iess an option. Option request sequence Indicates the sequence of request parameters sent by the DHCP client. Value 1 indicates the highest priority. Opti Op tion on ffor orma matt Indi Indica cate tess the the opti option on ffor orma mat, t, whi which ch can can be be hexa hexade deci cima mall or Ba Base se64 64.. The The option returned by the DHCP server is always in Base64 format. If the hexadecimal format is specified for this parameter, parameter, the ONT will convert the option in the Base64 format to that in the hexadecimal format. Opti Op tion on va valu luee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he op opti tion on va valu luee in th thee spe speci cifi fied ed form format at ca carr rrie ied d in a pa pack cket et sent from the DHCP server to the DHCP client. This parameter is not configurable but available for query. query. 2.4 LAN This topic describes how to configure the LAN port through t hrough the web page. 2.4.1 LAN Host Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose LAN > LAN Host Configuration. In the pane on the right, set the management IP address of Primmary Address and Secondary Address, as shown in Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 LAN host configuration NOTE The IP address of the device connected to the LAN port must be in the same subnet as the management IP address. In this way, you can access an ONT through the Web page and perform the query and management. 2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2.5 Security This topic describes how to configure the security through the web page 2.5.1 MAC Filter Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > MAC Filter Configuration. In the pane on the right, after after enabling MAC filter and and selecting the filter mode, mode, click New. On the dialog box that is displayed, configure the MAC filter rule for the PC to access the Internet, as shown in Figure 2-14. Figure 2-14 MAC Filter Configuration 2. Click Apply. The MAC address lists of PCs in the network are saved on the ONT. Configuring MAC filter rules enables the PCs that conform to the rules to access the Internet service or disables the PCs that do not conform to the rules to access the Internet service. A PC may have more than one IP addresses but a unique MAC address. Therefore, configuring MAC filter rules effectively controls the Internet service access access rights of PCs in a LAN. Table 2-6 2 -6 describes the parameters related to the MAC filter. Table 2-6 2 -6 Parameters related to the MAC address filter Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Parameter Description Enable MAC filter Indicates whether to enable the MAC address filter function. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Filter Mode Indicates the MAC address filter rule of the blacklist or whitelist. l Blacklist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed to pass. l Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is allowed to pass. The filter mode is global config mode. Thus, the blacklist and whitelist mode cannot be used at the same time. Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC address filter rule. 2.5.2 DoS Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > DoS Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the DoS attack-preventive configuration, as shown in Figure 2-15. Figure 2-15 DoS Configuration 2. Click Apply. Denial of service (DoS) attack is a network-based attack that denies users from accessing the Internet. The DoS attack initiates a large number of network connections, making the server or the program running on the server break down or server resources exhaust or denying users to access the Internet service. As a result, the network service fails. 2 -7 describes the parameters related to the DoS. Table 2-7 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 2-7 2 -7 Parameters related to the DoS Parameter Description Prevent SYN Flooding Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent SYN flooding attack. In the attack, several source hosts send SYN packets a destination host.the host. After receiving the SYNtoACK packets from destination host, the source hosts do not respond. In this case, the destination host establishes many connection queues for the source hosts and maintains these queues all the time because no ACK response is received. As a result, many resources are used and the destination host fails to provide normal services for normal connections. Prevent ICMP Echo Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent ICMP echo attack. In the attack, many ICMP echo packets are sent to a destination host within a short time. As a result, the network is congested or the resources of the host are exhausted. Prevent ICMP Redirect Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent ICMP redirect attack. In the attack, many ICMP redirect packets are sent to a destination host within a short time. As a result, the network is congested or the resources of the host are exhausted. 2.5.3 Precise Device Access Control Click Security tab, and choose Precise Device Access Control in the navigation tree on the left. Click New. In the displayed window, set LAN port, SSID or WAN port information, including Priority, Protocol and Mode,as shown in Figure 2-16. Figure 2-16 Parental Control Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2.5.4 Device Access Control 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > Device Access Control. In the pane on the right, configure the rule of ONT access control, as shown in Figure 2-17. Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible responsible for aany ny related subsequences. Figure 2-17 Device Access Control 2. Click Apply. 2.5.5 WAN Access Control Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > WAN Access Control Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters of the WAN access control, as shown in Figure 2-18 Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible for any related subsequences. Figure 2-18 WAN Access Control Configuration 2. Click Apply. 2.6 Network Applications This topic describes how to configure the USB, ALG, UPnP, UPnP, and ARP through the web page. 2.6.1 ARP Ping NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click the Network Application tab and then choose ARP Ping from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure ARP Ping parameters, including WAN Name, Interval, and Num of rep, as shown in Figure 2-19 Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-19 ARP Ping Configuration 2. Click Apply. 2.7 Voice This topic describes how to configure the voice service through the Web page. NOTE The Web page for configuring the voice service varies with the voice protocols. The following topics describe the Web pages after the H.248 protocol and the SIP protocol are loaded. 2.7.1 VoIP Basic Configuration l VoIP Basic Configuration - SIP Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Basic Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters parameters of a VoIP VoIP interface can be configured, configured, including the IP addresses of the primary server and secondary server, server, and digitmap. i. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss for for a v voic oicee in inter terfac face. e. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Figure 2-20 Interface basic parameters–SIP parameters–SIP protocol ii. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Config Configure ure basi basicc param paramete eters rs for for a SI SIP P voice voice u user ser.. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-21 User basic parameters–SIP protocol b. Click Apply. Table 2-8 2 -8 describes the parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. Table 2-8 2 -8 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Outbound Proxy Server Address Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP outbound server. This server IP address overrides the primary server IP address. Specifically Specifically,, when IP addresses addresses of both the primary outbound server server and the primary primary server are configured, the primary server IP address does not take effect. Outbound Proxy Server Port Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Outbound Proxy Server Port Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary SIP outbound server. Port of the Standby Outbound Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP proxy server. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Port of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary SIP proxythe server. Port of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Home Domain Indicates the domain of the registration server of the VoIP terminal in network communications, such as softx3000.huawei.com. Local Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Digitmap Indicates the voice digitmap. Digi Digitm tmap ap Mat Match ch M Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess th thee digi digitm tmap ap mat match chin ing g mode mode,, incl includ udin ing g Min Min an and d Max. l Min: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system immediately reports the number to the call proxy. l Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the call proxy but starts the short timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the system reports the number to the call proxy after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the call proxy. Regi Regist stra rati tion on Peri Period od Indi Indica cate tess tthe he vali valid d re regi gist stra rati tion on peri period od.. When When th this is peri period od expires, the SIP user needs to register again. The value range is 1s to 65534s, and the default value is 600s. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Media Port Indicates the media streams WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Enable User Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Enables or disables a SIP user. The SIP user starts the registration only after being enabled. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description URI Indicates the SIP user identifier. It uniquely identifies a SIP user and the value must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Regist Reg istrat ration ion User User Name Name Indica Indicates tes the name name used used for for S SIP IP user user regist registrat ration ion.. It is is Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port generally the user phone number. Indi Indica cate tess th thee POT POTS S port port aass ssoc ocia iate ted d with with the the SIP SIP use userr. NOTE When the device provides only one POTS port, Associated POTS Port is hidden. Authentication User Name Indicates the user name used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Password Indicates the password used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. l VoIP Interface Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Interface Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters of a VoIP interface can be configured, including the address of the primary MGC, device name, and region, as shown in Figure 2-22 and Figure 2-23. i. Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss fo forr a voice voice int interf erfac ace. e. Figure 2-22 Interface basic parameters - H.248 protocol Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) ii. Confi Configure gure basic parameter parameterss for for an an H H.248– .248–based based voice user. user. Figure 2-23 User basic parameters - H.248 protocol b. Click Apply. Table 2-9 2 -9 describes parameters used for configuring a V VoIP oIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. Table 2-9 2 -9 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Address of the Primary MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary MGC server. Port of of the Primar Primary y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the primary MGC server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Address of the Standby MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary MGC server. Port of of the Standb Standby y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the secondary MGC server and the t he VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. MG Domain Fill the domain name when MID Format is set to Domain Name, such as user.huawei.com. user.huawei.com. MG Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Device Name Fill the device name when MID Format is set to Device Name. MID Format Indicates the MG registration format. It can be the MG domain name, IP address, or device name. The MG register format must be the same as the register format provided by the ISP. ISP. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Digitmap Matching Mode Indicates the digitmap matching mode, including Min and Max. l Min: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system immediately reports the number to the softswitches. l Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the softswitches but starts the short timer. timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the t he system reports the number to the softswitches after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the softswitches. Enable Digitmap Automatch Enables or disables the function of digitmap auto match. RTP TID Prefix Indicates tth he index of of the ephemeral tteerminatio ion n. Th The de default prefix on Huawei softswitches softswitches is A100. Start Number of RTP TID Indicates the start number of RTP TID. The default start number is 0. Width of RTP TID Number Indicates the width of RTP TID. The default number is 6. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the MGC server. Media Port Indicates the WAN port of the voice media streams. When the name of the media port is empty, empty, it indicates that the name of the media port is the same as that of the signaling port. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Enab Enable le Physi hysiccal T TIID Enab Enable less or or dis disaabl blees an an ON ONT PO POTS port port.. Physical TID Indicates the POTS port identifier. Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port Indi Indica cate tess th thee bind bindin ing g of a POT POTS S port port aand nd a phy physi sica call term termin inal al.. 2.7.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration l VoIP Advanced Configuration - SIP protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure parameters of a VoIP user, including the register user name, authentication user name, password, and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 2-24 and Figure 2-25. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Figure 2-24 VoIP advanced configuration - interface advanced parameters (SIP protocol) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-25 VoIP advanced configuration - physical interface parameters (SIP protocol) b. Click Apply. Table 2-10 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. protocol. Table 2-10 2 -10 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Advanced Interface Parameters(SIP) Enable Echo Enables or disables echo cancellation. By default, echo cancellation is Cancellation enabled. Enable Subscribe Enables or disables subscription of user rights. When the server type is NGN SIP, SIP, this function is disabled. Silence detection Indicates a silence detection method for a network call. This method is used to detect silence in full-duplex and half-duplex modes, isolates voice from background noise, and and filters out redundant audio audio data. Silence detection function controls the global mode in silence compression mode. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Silence compression mode Supports 2 modes: l l Fax Transmode Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Codec mode: In Advanced User Parameters(SIP), select Silence compression . Then, you can set G.711MuLaw, G.711ALaw, G.729 and G.722. Global mode: Select Silence detection, and you can configure all coding/decoding modes. Indicates the fax mode, including pass-through and T.38. T.38. l Pass-through: The MG encodes the fax signals transmitted by a fax machine according to the voice codec (G.711), and then coverts such signals into the RTP data packets for real-time transmission over an IP network. l T.38: The MG, through ITU-T T.38, converts the T.30-compliant fax signals transmitted by a fax machine into the T.38 packets for transmission over an IP bearer network. Fax Switch Mode Indicates the fax switching mode, including negotiation and self-switch. The fax switching mode is selected according to the customer requirements. Profile Parameters Indicates the control point parameters. parameters areare selected according to the softswitch. Generally, Such the default settings adopted. Software Parameters Indicates the software parameters. Such parameters are selected according to the softswitch. Generally, Generally, the default settings are adopted. Digitmap Short Timer Indicates the short timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digitmap Long Timer Indicates the long timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. Shared User Mode Specifies whether to bind telephone numbers to phone ports. l Disabled: The shared user mode is disabled. l Parallel ringing: If this option is selected, only one telephone number can be configured. That is, all phone ports on the ONT share a telephone number.. All telephones ring together when an incoming call iiss made. If number two telephone numbers are configured, this option is invalid. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Multihomin g Mode The multi-homing mode supports multiple IP addresses for one end point. That is, one end point can use multiple physical network ports. This improves the end point reliability. If this mode is enabled, two servers (active/standby) must be configured. l Disabled: The multi-homing mode is disabled. l Dual homing (not automatic switchback): Once an ONT is registered with a softswitch (no matter active or standby), the softswitch is always used if it works correctly. correctly. l Dual homing (automatic switchback): The ONT switches back to the active softswitch when detecting that the active softswitch recovers and is reachable. l Loading sharing: The ONT is registered with one of the addresses resolved from the domain name to ensure that multiple softswitches process services in load load sharing mode. DTMF Transmissio n Mode Specifies the DTMF signal transmission mode. DTMF signals can be transmitted transparently or in RFC2833 packets. RFC2833 Payload Type Specifies the payload value used for transmit DTMF signals in RFC2833 packets. It ranges ranges from 96 to 127. Voice Server Type Indicates the supported voice server type. l IMS SIP Server: core network service type based on the SIP protocol. l Softswitch: softswitch NGN service type based on the SIP protocol. l H.248 Server: H.248 service type. Offhook DT-AS ACK Interval Indicates the time during which the DT-A DT-AS S signal (detects whether a phone supports offhook CLIP) waits for a response from the phone. Option 120 Priority Configures the valid priority of option 120. l Ignore: Does not use the option 120 mode. l Highest: Indicates that the option 120 mode for IP address acquisition is higher than other modes. For example, the web page is used for proxy server address configuration. l Lowest: Indicates that the option 120 mode for IP address acquisition is lower than other modes. For example, the web page is used for proxy server address configuration. Advanced User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Code Codecc In Indi dica cate tess eenc ncod odin ing/ g/de deco codi ding ng.. In In en enco codi ding ng,, tthe he DSP DSP en enco code dess TDM TDM voic voicee data into packets and sends the packets to the IP network. In decoding, the DSP decodes the voice packets received from the network and sends the data to the TDM side. Four types of codec are supported: G.711MuLaw, G.711MuLaw, G. 711ALaw,, G.729, and G.722; and supports silence compression. 711ALaw Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Packet Pack et Ti Time me Indicates Indicates the interv interval al at which which the DSP assemb assembles les voice voice packets. packets. Differe Different nt encoding modes support different packetization periods. The period can be 10 ms, 20 ms, or 30 ms, and the default period is 20 ms. Pr Prio iori rity ty Indi Indica cate tess the the cod codec ec prio priori rity ty.. T Two wo us user erss nego negoti tiat atee the the prio priori rity ty in des desce cend ndin ing g order. Currently, priorities 1-4 are supported, with 1 being the highest order. priority.. priority Issue 01 (2019-09-20) En Enab able led d Indi Indica cate tess whe wheth ther er the the use userr ccar arri ries es the the co code decc (en (enab able le:: ccar arry ry;; d dis isab able le:: not not carry). DSP TX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the local POTS side to the remote IP side. DSP RX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the remote IP side to the local POTS side. Enable Hotline Enables or disables the hotline function. Hotline Number Indicates the hotline number. After the user specifies a number as the hotline number and also enables the hotline function, the number is automatically dialed if the user does not dial the number following a delay time expiration after offhook. Hotline Delay Indicates the period over which the user does not dial the number after offhook. Enable Call Forwarding Uncondition al Enables the call forwarding unconditional (CFU) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can unconditionally forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox. Call Forwarding Uncondition al Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding Busy Enables the call forwarding busy (CFB) function. A called party-side service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox when the user is busy on another call. Call Forwarding Busy Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding on No Reply Enables the call forwarding on no reply (CFNR) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox if the calls are not answered within a preset period. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Call Forwarding on No Reply Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Call Waiting Waiting A calle called d party-side party-side service service,, with which, which, if user C calls calls user A when when user user A is talking with user B, user A hears a call waiting (CW) tone indicating that there is an incoming call. Message Waiting Indicator This indicator on the phone is on when receiving a new message for a user who is provisioned with the voice mailbox service. Three-party Call When user A is communicating with user B and user C wants to jjoin oin the call, user A can call user C without disconnecting the call with user B. In this case, these 3 users can communicate with each other or two of three can communicate with each other. Call Holding A user in a call can hold this call. Malicious Call Identificatio n A called party-side service, with which, a user can identify the calling number if the user receives a malicious call. Caller ID Display A called party-side service allows the number of the calling party to be presented to the called called party. party. Anonymous Call This service does not allow the number of the calling party who registers this service to be presented to the called party. party. Call Transfer Enables or disables the call transfer function. Physical Port Parameters (SIP) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Ringing Voltage Indicates the voltage when a phone rings. DC Volt Voltage age Indica Indicates tes the DC volt voltage age on a voice voice port port.. Range Range:: 0–25. It is required if a traditional phone connected cannot ring. The specific value needs to be checked. For example, set it to 10 and check whether the issue is resolved. If the issue is not resolved, set it to 11. Attempt to set the value till the issue is resolved. Port TX gain Indicates the Tx gain on a port. Port RX gain Indicates the Rx gain on a port. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Parameter Description Lower Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the lower threshold for flash hooking (press the flash button). This function is used for call transfer from an external call to an internal call. Upper Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the upper threshold for flash hooking. On-hook Confirmatio n Time Indicates the onhook confirmation time. Impeda Imp edance nce Indica Indicates tes the impeda impedance nce of the connec connected ted device device.. Feed Current Feed current supplies power to speech circuits, which requires only current but no voltage. CLIP Format Specifies the CLIP format that is supported by the connected phone, including Mdmf-FSK , Sdmf-FSK , Dtmf, R1.5, and Etsi. FSK Transmissio n Delay Indicates the delay before FSK signals are issued. CLIP Flow l After ring: the number of the calling party is presented after ringing. l Before ring: the number of the calling party is presented before ringing. Enable DSP Template This function can only be used for maintenance and cannot be enabled. Polarity Reversal on POTS Port Enables or disables polarity reversal on a POTS port. This function is usually used for charging. Display Time in CLIP Enables or disables time synchronization on a phone. After this function is enabled, the ONT issues time to the phone. Enable DSP HighPass Filter Enables this function to mask the low frequency (lower than 50 Hz) interference on the phone. Enable Forced FSK Transmissio n Enables or disables forced FSK transmission. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) NOTE Physical Port Parameters are physical parameters (defined in the standard) of a POTS port. For details, see the standard. l VoIP Advanced Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure the line name and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 2-26. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-26 VoIP advanced configuration - H.248 protocol b. Click Apply. Table 2-11 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. protocol. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 2-11 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Configure Global Parameters(H Parameters(H.248) .248) Enable Enab le Echo Cancellatio Cancellation n Echo is mainly produced produced from from PSTN PSTN users. users. Remote Remote users users can feel the echo generated on the user port and the call quality is affected. Fax Transmode The fax can be divided into fax pass through (G.711), T.38 fax (T.38 encoding). Fax Swi witc tch h Mo Mod de Wheth hether er to parti articcip ipaate in th thee SIP si sign gnaali ling ng,, fax ty type pe can be divided into consultations fax, since switching the fax. Profile Index The system has built-in universal profile index, if does not meet the demand, according to the actual specific configuration Profile index. Profile Parameters If the profile index is User-defined, configure the profile parameter according according to actual configurations. configurations. Soft Parameter Select the default software parameters. Start Sta rt Nego Negotia tiate te V Vers ersion ion H.248 H.248 vers version ion of tthe he nego negotia tiatio tions ns base based d on the profil profilee parameter.. parameter Digi Digitm tmap ap St Star artt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess the the sta start rt ti time merr of of the the di digi gitm tmap ap.. This This tim timer er st star arts ts up up when a user picks up the phone and hears the dialing tone. If the user does not dial digits within the time specified by the timer, the call is released. Digi Digitm tmap ap Sho Short rt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee shor shortt tim timer er of of th thee di digi gitm tmap ap.. This This tim timer er sta start rtss up if if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digi Digitm tmap ap Lon Long g Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee long long tim timer er of the the d dig igitm itmap ap.. This This tim timer er sta start rtss up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. Enab Enable le Hear eartbea tbeatt Ena Enable bles o orr disa disabl blees h heeartb artbeeat at.. A he heaartbe rtbeaat mes messa sage ge is th thee one one exchanged between 2 devices and it does not require a response message. This message is used to report its normal running. Heartbeat Message Interval Indicates the interval at which heartbeat messages are sent. Heartbeat Message Retransmission Interval Indicates the interval at which heartbeat messages are retransmitted. Heartbeat Message Retransmission Count Indicates the retransmission count of heartbeat messages. User Advanced Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description DSP TX Ga Gain Indicates tth he direction iin n wh which ga gain ttaakes eefffect: ffrrom the remote IP side to the local POTS side. DSP RX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the local POTS side to the remote IP side. Physical Port Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Ringing Voltage Indicates th the voltage when a phone rings. DC Voltage Indicates the DC voltage on a voice port. Range: 0–25. It is required if a traditional phone connected cannot ring. The specific value needs to be checked. For example, set it to 10 and check whether the issue is resolved. If the issue is not resolved, set it to 11. Attempt to set the value till the issue is resolved. Port TX gain Indicates the Tx gain on a port. Port RX gain Indicates the Rx gain on a port. Lower Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the lower threshold for flash hooking (press the flash button). This function is used for for call transfer from from an external call to an internal call. Upper Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the upper threshold for flash hooking. On-hook Confirmation Time Indicates the onhook confirmation time. Impedance Indicates the impedance of a port. Feed Current Feed current supplies power to speech circuits, which requires only current but no voltage. CLIP Format Specifies the CLIP format. FSK Tr Transmi ansmission ssion Delay Delay CLIP Flow Indic Indicates ates the delay before before FS FSK K si signals gnals are issued. issued. Indicates the CLIP flow before and after ringing. En Enab able le DSP DSP Tem Templ plat atee This This ffun unct ctio ion n can can only only be be used used for for m mai aint nten enan ance ce an and d cann cannot ot be be enabled. Disp Displa lay y Tim Timee iin n CLI CLIP P Enab Enable less o orr d dis isab able less ttim imee syn synch chro roni niza zati tion on on a p pho hone ne.. Enable DSP HighPass Filter Enables this function to mask the low l ow frequency (lower than 50 Hz) interference on the phone. Enable Forced FSK Transmission Enables or disables forced FSK transmission. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) NOTE Physical Port Parameters are physical parameters (defined in the standard) of a POTS port. For details, see the standard. 2.7.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Pr otocol Conversion Click the Voice tab, and choose SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion from the navigation tree on the left. 1. In the right pane, pane, you can can change change the VoIP VoIP protoc protocol ol (SIP (SIP or H.248) H.248) by changin changing g the value of the Voice parameter, as shown in Figure 2-27. Figure 2-27 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion NOTE Exercise caution when performing this operation because it will interrupt the ongoing call and delete current data. 2. Click Apply. 2.8 System Tools This topic describes how to use the system tools on the web page, including using the tools to restart the device, and restore the default configuration. 2.8.1 Reboot In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Reboot. In the pane on the right, click Reboot to restart the device, as shown in i n Figure 2-28. Figure 2-28 Reboot Save the configuration data before restarting the device. For details, see 2.8.2 Configuration File. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2.8.2 Configuration File In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Configuration File. In the pane on the right, click the button as required as shown in Figure 2-29. Figure 2-29 Configuration File l Click Save to save the configuration file to the flash memory. This prevents data loss due to the restart of the device. l Click Save and Restart to save the configuration file and reboot the ONT. l Click Download Configuration File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the configuration file, and then back up the file to the local disk. l Click Browse following the Configuration File text box. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the configuration file to be uploaded. Click Update Configuration File to upload the configuration file that is saved in the local disk. After the configuration file is successfully uploaded, the device automatically restarts and then the new configuration takes effect. Before uploading the configuration file, choose the configuration file with the correct type and the name of the selected configuration file must not be the same as that of any file saved in the device. Otherwise, the configuration file fails to be uploaded. When IE8 is used for configuration file downloading and you click the t he save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded configuration file is incomplete. 2.8.3 Firmware Upgrade NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Firmware Upgrade. In the pane on the right, click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the target Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) software version of the device. Click Update Firmware to upgrade the software of the device, as shown in Figure 2-30. Figure 2-30 Firmware Upgrade 2. After the up upgrad gradee is su succes ccessful, sful, a message message is is displayed displayed indicating indicating that that the device device needs needs to be reset. Click Restart. The configuration data takes effect after the device is reset. 2.8.4 Restore Default Configuration In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Restore Default Configuration. In the pane on the right, click Default to restore the factory defaults, as shown in Figure 2-31. Figure 2-31 Restore Default Configuration Exercise caution when you perform this operation because it restores factory defaults. 2.8.5 Maintenance In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Maintenance. 1. In the the pan panee on on the the righ right, t, clic click k Start Hardware Fault Detection to start hardware fault detection, as shown in Figure 2-32. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-32 Maintenance 2.8.6 VoIP Statistics Click the System Tools tab, and choose VoIP Statistics from the navigation tree on the left. Figure 2-33 VoIP Statistics 2.8.7 VoIP Diagnose NOTE LS1015, LS2025 andHS3025and LS1035Vdo not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Click the System Tools tab, and choose VoIP Diagnose from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, set POTS Index and click Start Test to start a voice loop line or circuit line test. l Figure 2-34 shows the parameter settings for a loop line test. Figure 2-34 Loop test NOTE If you want to perform a loop line test during a call, select Forced Test On Busy. l Figure 2-35 shows the parameter settings for a circuit line test. Figure 2-35 Circuit test 2.8.8 Remote Mirror 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Remote Mirror, as shown in Figure 2-36. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-36 Remote mirror Packets sent to and transmitted from the CPU can be remotely captured for analysis based on the configuration. configuration. 2. – Source IP Address: indicates the IP address of the WAN port where remote mirroring is performed. – Destination IP Address: indicates the IP address of the host where the result is located. – Type Type of the captured packets: indicates the type of the captured packets that are broadband, wifi and voice voice . Click Start. NOTE Some third-party plug-ins, such as Google Chrome Frame, may lead to downloading failure. If such a failure occurs, disable the plug-in. Based on your requirements, this function may involve using, obtaining, or saving some information about users' communications for the purpose of safeguarding network operation and protecting services. Huawei alone is unable to collect or save the content of users' communications. It is suggested that you activate the interception-related functions based on the applicable laws and regulations in terms of purpose and and scope o off usage. Y You ou are oblig obligated ated to take considerab considerable le measures measures to ensure th that at the content content of users' communications is fully protected when the content is being used and saved. 2.8.9 User Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > User Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 2-37. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-37 Log l You cannot configure Log Level, which indicates the level of the saved log. The log whose level is equal to or higher than the debug-level log is saved. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 2.8.10 Debug Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Debug Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 2-38. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-38 Debug Log l Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 2.8.11 One-Click Diagnosis On the System Tools tab page, choose One-Click Diagnosis from the left navigation tree. On the right pane, click One-Click Diagnosis to start one-click diagnosis on ONT password security,, Internet connection status, ONT hardware status, and voice service status, as shown security in Figure 2-39. Figure 2-39 One-click diagnosis Figure 2-40. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-40 One-click diagnosis 2.8.12 ONT Authentication 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > ONT Authentication Authentication. In the pane on the right, you can can view or change the authentication mode for for the registration of the ONT on the OLT, as shown in Figure 2-41 and Figure 2-42. Figure 2-41 ONT authentication (administrator) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) NOTE There are 2 modes for ONT authentication: LOID and Password. l When Authentication Mode is LOID, you can query and change the LOID and Password of an ONT. l When Authentication Mode is Password, you can query and change the Password Mode, Password, and SN of an ONT. An administrator can change the password of an online ONT. If this ONT authentication mode is password and you change its password, this ONT goes offline. Figure 2-42 ONT authentication (common user) NOTE A common user cannot change the password of an online ONT. 2. Click Apply. 2.8.13 Time Setting NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Time Setting. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the system time, including the SNTP server, time zone, and daylight saving time (DST), as shown in Figure 2-43. Figure 2-43 Time Setting 2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Click Apply. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 2-12 2 -12 describes the parameters related to the system time. Table 2-12 2 -12 Parameters related to the system time Parameter Description Auto Synchronization Indicates whether to enable the auto synchronization network Network Time Time Server time server, that is, SNTP server. Pr Prim imar ary y SNT SNTP P Ser Serve verr Indi Indica cate tess tthe he prim primar ary y SNT SNTP P ser serve verr. Secondar Seco ndary y SNTP SNTP Serve Serverr Indicates Indicates the secondary secondary SNTP server server.. Time Zone Indicates the time zone. Time Synchronization Cycle Indicates whether to enable the DST. DST Start Time Indicates the DST start time. DST End Time Indicates the DST end time. NOTE If the SNTP server is configured based on domain na name me format, a static route or a default route must be configured. If the static route or default route is not configured, configured, the ONT will fail to obtain time from the SNTP server. If the SNTP server is configured based on IP address format, you can skip the operation above. 2.8.14 TR-069 NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > TR-069. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 server, as shown in Figure 2-44. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 2-44 TR-069 NOTE Configuring the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 requires creating a WAN interface. In addition, Service List of the WAN interface must contain the TR069. For details, see 2.3.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. 2 -13 describes the TR-069 parameters. Table 2-13 Table 2-13 2 -13 TR-069 parameters Parameter Description ACS Parameter Settings Enable Periodic Informing Indicates whether to enable the notification function. l If the notification function is enabled, the ONT actively sends a connection request to the TR-069 server. l If the notification function is disabled, the ONT does not actively send a connection request to the TR-069 server. server. When the notification function is enabled, the Period Inform Interval and Period Inform Time parameters can be set. In Info form rmin ing g IInt nter erva vall Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In Indi dica cate tess tthe he inte interv rval al for for the the ONT ONT to to ssen end d a con conne nect ctio ion n rreq eque uest st to the TR-069 server. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description In Info forrmi ming ng Time ime Indic ndicat atees the the ti time me for for th thee ONT ONT to se sen nd a conn conneect ctio ion n requ requeest to the TR-069 server. ACS URL Indicates the address of the TR-069 server to which the ONT sends a connection request. ACS User ser Na Name Indic ndicat atees tthe he us useer n nam amee for th thee ONT ONT tto o rreegi gist ster er wi with th th thee TRTR-0 069 server. ACS Password Indicates the password for the ONT to register with the TR-069 server. Connection Request User Name Indicates the user name to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. Connection Request Password Indicates the password to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. DSCP Defined by RFC2474 "Definition of the Differentiated Services Field". Differentiated Services Services Code Point (DSCP) uses code values for priority marking. DSCP can be customized for ISPs based onQoS service requirements requirements so that devices devic es on a network perform based based on the DSCP value. value . Enable Certificate Authentication Authentication and Set Private Key Password Enable Certificate Authentication Enable the certificate if the ACS is connected through SSL. Privat Pri vatee Ke Key y Passw Password ord Sets Sets the the priva private te k key ey pass passwor word d after after the certif certifica icate te is is enabl enabled. ed. Conf Confir irm m Pas Passw swor ord d Conf Confir irms ms the the pass passwo word rd an and d eens nsur ures es th that at it is th thee sa same me as Private Key Password. Import Certificate Certificate Indicates the certificate file provided by the ISP. 2.8.15 Advanced Power Management 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Advanced Power Management . In the pane on the right, you can start the ONT energy saving, as shown in Figure 2-45. Figure 2-45 Advanced Power Management Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. Click Apply. 2.8.16 Modify Login Password 1. Click the System Tools tab and then choose Modify Login Password from the navigation tree. In the right pane, change the password of the root user, as shown in Figure 2-46. Figure 2-46 Modify Login Password NOTE 2. l After the user logs in to the ONT Web interface using the default common user name and password,, the Modify Login Password interface is automatically displayed, prompting the password user to change the initial password. After the user successfully changes the password, the Modify Login Password interface is no longer displayed in the following logins. l Change the initial user name and password after logging in to the web page. Click Apply. 2.8.17 Fault Info Collect Click the System Tools tab, and choose Fault Info Collect from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click Start to collect ONT fault information, as shown in Figure 2-47. Figure 2-47 Fault information collection Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) NOTE After the information is collected, click Download to download the collected information to a local directory. When IE8 is used for fault info collect and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the fault info collect is incomplet incomplete. e. 2.8.18 Indicator Status Management 1. Click System Tools. On the navigation tree, choose Indicator Status Managemen Managementt. In the right pane, you can set the indicator switch and disabling time segment, as shown in Figure 2-48. Figure 2-48 Indicator status management NOTE If both Global indicator disabling time segment and Customized indicator disabling time segment are configured, Customized indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is selected for Customized indicator disabling time segment, and Global indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is not selected. 2. Click Apply. 2.8.19 Open Source Software Notice In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Open Source Software Notice. In the pane on the right, you can view the open source software notice for the product, as shown in Figure 2-49. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2 Web Page Reference (HG8110H, HG8240H, HG8242H, EG8240H, EG8240H5, HG8240u, EG8242H) Figure 2-49 Open source software notice Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) This topic describes the usage and meanings of the parameters on the web page. Before configuring and viewing the parameters on the web page, log in to the web page. For details about how to log in to the web page, see 3.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface. The web page of the HG8245H/HG8247H/HG8245Q/HG8045H/HG8 HG8245H/HG8247H/HG8245Q/HG8045H/HG82 245U/HG8245Q2/ EG8245H/EG8247H/HG8121H/HG8045/EG8120L/EG EG8245H/EG8247H/HG8 121H/HG8045/EG8120L/EG8247W 8247W varies according to ONT capability sets. For bridging-type ONTs, GUIs for Layer 3 and voice configurations are not supported. For ONTs without Wi-Fi interfaces, GUIs for wireless network configurations are not supported. For details on ONT capability sets, refer to 7.1 Reference of GPON ONT Capability Sets. NOTE This topic uses figures of the HG8245H accessed by the administrator (telecomadmin) as examples. Different ONTs may have different screencaptures, actual screencaptures prevail. Because different voice protocols, the Voice node contains different parameters. parameters. Only one of the SIP and H.248 protocols can be supported at a time. Which protocol is supported depends on the ONT used. The configuration window for an administrator is different from that for a common user. l Compared with a common user, an administrator has permissions to view and configure all parameters on the web page. A common user can configure and query some nodes and parameters and the queried information is less than that queried by an administrator. administrator. This topic lists different nodes queried by a common user. For details, see the web page for a common user. l A common user does not have permissions to view the following parameters: Issue 01 (2019-09-20) – Remote Management under the Status node – DHCP Client Option Configuration, DHCP Client Request Parameter under the WAN node Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) – LAN Port Work Mode, DHCP Server Option Configuration under the LAN node – Default Route Configuration, Static Route Configuration, and DHCPv6 Information under the IPv6 node – Firewall Level Configuration, DoS Configuration and WAN Access Control Configuration under the Security node – Default Route Configuration, Static Route Configuration, Policy Route Configuration, VLAN Bingding Configuration and Service Route Configuration under the Route node – ALG Configuration, Portal Configuration, IGMP Configuration, Intelligent Channel Configuration, Terminal Limit Configuration, ARP Ping and ARP Aging under the Network Application node – The Voice node – Firmware Upgrade, VoIP Diagnose, VoIP Statistics, Remote Mirror, Debug log, Firewall Log, Time Setting, TR-069, Intelligent Channel Statistics and Fault Info Collect under the System Tools node 3.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface This topic describes the data plan and procedure for logging in to the web configuration interface. Context Before setting up the configuration environment, ensure that data information listed in Table 3-1 is available. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 3-1 3 -1 Data plan Item Description User name and password Default settings: l Administrator (installation and maintenance personnel): HG Series: – User name: telecomadmin – Password: admintelecom EG Series: – User name: Epadmin – Password: adminEp NOTE l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times within five minutes the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the NMS. Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, co preceding contact ntact the cor correspondin responding g ISP ISP.. l CAUTION l l Please change the initial password to ensure administrator account security. l Do not provide terminal users with the password of the administrator account. The administrator account is used by the ISP for O&M. If a terminal user uses the administrator account, service parameters may be incorrectly modified and services may be affected. Common user (terminal user): HG Series: – User name: root – Password: adminHW EG Series: Issue 01 (2019-09-20) – User name: Epuser – Password: userEp Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Item Description NOTE l The common user account can be used to query the service status. For ONTs that support Wi-Fi and the USB storage function, the common user account can be used to configure services such as Wi-Fi and home sharing. l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, you can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the Web. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, co preceding contact ntact the cor correspondin responding g ISP ISP.. CAUTION Change the initial password after common users log in to the web page. LAN IP address and subnet mask Default settings: l l IP address and subnet mask of the PC HG Series: – IP address: 192.168.100.1 – Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 EG Series: – IP address: 192.168.18.1 – Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as tthe he LAN IP address of the ONT. For example: l IP address: 192.168.100.100 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Procedure Step 1 Use a network cable to connect the LAN port of the ONT to a PC. Step 2 Ensure that the Internet Explorer (IE) of the PC does not use the proxy server. The following section considers IE 8.0 as an example to describe how to check whether the IE uses the proxy server. server. 1. Star Startt the the IE, IE, an and d ch choo oose se Tools > Internet Options from the main menu of the IE window. Then, the Internet Options interface is displayed. 2. In the Internet Options interface, click the Connections tab, and then click LAN settings. 3. In the Proxy server area, ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). check box is not selected (that is, without the "√" sign). If the check box is selected, deselect it, and then click OK. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Step 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. For details, see Table 3-1. Step 4 Log in to the Web Web configuration interface. 1. Enter http://192.168.100.1 in the address bar of IE (192.168.100.1 is the default IP address of the ONT), and then press Enter to display the login interface, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Login interface NOTE The web page login supports SSL3.0, TLS1.0, TLS1.1, and TLS1.2. It is recommended that you use high-security TLS1.1 or TLS1.2 if you log in to the ONT using https. The TCP port 80 is used for listening for HTTPS packets. You need to type "https://192.168.100.1:80" in the address bar of IE and press Enter to log in to the ONT. 2. In the login interface interface,, ente enterr the use name name and and password password.. For detail detailss about about default default settings settings of the user name and password, see Table 3-1. After the password authentication is passed, the Web Web configuration interface interface is displayed. ----End 3.2 Status This topic describes how to query the information about the t he ONT, ONT, including ETH port information, optical information, and user device information through the web page. 3.2.1 WAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > WAN Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the status of the WAN WAN interface, mode of obtaining an IP address, IP address, and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 3-2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-2 WAN Information NOTE Click a record in the WAN list, you can view more detailed information by clicking a record in the WAN list. Table 3-2 3 -2 shows the mappings between ONT PPPoE dial-up error messages and Windows Windows error messages. Table 3-2 3 -2 Mappings between ONT PPPoE dial-up error codes and Windows error codes Issue 01 (2019-09-20) ONT ON T PPP PPPoE oE Dia Dialu lup p Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Mapp Mappin ing g Wind Window owss Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Link negotiation fails. Error 732: Your computer and the remote computer could not agree on PPP control protocols. User name or password authentication Error 691: Access was denied because the user fails. name and/or password was invalid on the domain. The The sseerver ver tteerm rmin inaates tes tthe he ses sessio sion. Erro Errorr 668 668: T The he conne onneccti tion on was te terrmina minate ted. d. The session times out. Error 721: The remote computer did not respond. The system detects that there is no network access request and therefore disconnects the link automatically automatically.. None The user does not enable the device. None The user does not manually perform a dial. None The device goes offline. None Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) ONT ON T PPP PPPoE oE Dia Dialu lup p Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Mapp Mappin ing g Wind Window owss Erro Errorr Mess Messag age e Dialup fails. None 3.2.2 VoIP Information NOTE LS1015, LS2025, HS3025 and LS1035V do not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > VoIP Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the information such as user status and call status. The SIP configuration page is slightly different from the H.248 configuration page, as shown in Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4. Figure 3-3 VoIP Information - SIP Figure 3-4 VoIP Information - H.248 If the VoIP service needs to be restarted, click Restart VoIP in the pane on the right. 3.2.3 WLAN Information Information NOTE HG8240A does not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > WLAN Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the information such as Wi-Fi port status, Wi-F Wi-Fii packet statistics, and SSID, as shown in Figure 3-5. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-5 WLAN Information 3.2.4 Home Network Information NOTE HG8240A does not support this web page. Click the Status tab, and choose Home Network Information from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, check the device status, statistical information, and neighbor AP information of external APs in the WiFi network, as shown in Figure 3-6. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-6 Smart WiFi coverage 3.2.5 Eth Port Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Eth Port Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the duplex mode, speed, and status of the ETH port, as shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7 Eth Port Information 3.2.6 DHCP Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > DHCP Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the basic information about the DHCP server, server, including the IP address assigned to the connected PC through DHCP, DHCP, MAC address, and remaining lease time, as shown in Figure 3-8. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-8 DHCP Information 3.2.7 Optical Information NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Optical Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the optical status, transmit optical power and receive optical power of the optical module, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Optical Information 3.2.8 Battery Information NOTE EG8247W do not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Battery Information. In the pane on the right, capacity,, as shown in Figure 3-10. you can view the power supply mode and available battery capacity Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-10 Device Information 3.2.9 Device Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Status > Device Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the product name, hardware version, and software version, as shown in Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Device Information 3.2.10 Remote Manage Click the Status tab and then choose Remote Manage from the navigation tree. In the right pane, view the remote remote management status and and service application status, status, as shown in Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12 Remote Manage Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.2.11 User Device Information Click the Status tab, and choose User Device Information from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, user device information is displayed, including the host name, device type, IP address, MAC address, and online status, as shown in Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 User device information 3.2.12 Service Provisioning Status NOTE LS1035V/LS1035/LS2035/HS3025 do not support this web page. Click the Status tab, and choose Service Provisioning Status from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, the ONT service provisioning status is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-14. Figure 3-14 Service provisioning status 3.2.13 Cloud Platform Status NOTE EG8247W do not support this web page. On the Status tab page, choose Cloud Platform Status from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, query the running status of the cloud platform, as shown in Figure 3-15. Figure 3-15 Cloud platform status Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.3 WAN This topic describes how to configure the WAN interfac interfacee through the web page. 3.3.1 WAN Configuration l WAN Configuration - route a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se WAN > WAN Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set WAN Mode to Route WAN, as shown in Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-17. Figure 3-16 WAN Configuration - route(IPv4) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-17 WAN Configuration - route(IPv6) b. Click Apply. All data associated with the WAN will be deleted after you delete the WAN port configuration. Exercise caution when you perform this operation. Table 3-3 3 -3 describes the parameters related to the W WAN AN in route mode. Table 3-3 3 -3 Parameters related to the WAN in route mode Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Parameter Description Enable WAN Indicates whether to enable the WAN connection. En Enca caps psul ulat atio ion n Mod Modee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he en enca caps psul ulat atio ion n mod modee of of a WAN in inte terf rfac ace. e. It ca can n be be set to IPoE or PPPoE. Protocol Ty Type Indicates tth he protocol tty ype of a WAN iin nterface. It It ccaan be set to to IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4/IPv6. WAN Mode Indicates the WAN interface mode. It can be set to Bridge WAN or Route WAN. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Service Type Indicates the service type of the WAN interface. It can be set to TR069, INTERNET, TR069_INTERNET , VOIP, TR069_VOIP , VOIP_INTERNET , TR069_VOIP_INTERNET , IPTV_INTERNET , VOIP_IPTV_INTERNET , TR069_IPTV_INTERNET, TR069_VOIP_IPTV_INTERNET , IPTV, OTHER, VOIP_IPTV, TR069_IPTV or TR069_VOIP_IPTV . Enable VLAN Selects this check box to set VLAN ID and 802.1p priority. VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. It ranges from 1 to 4094. The VLAN ID must be the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT. 802.1p Policy Indicates the 802.1p priority policy. l Use specified value: indicates that a specified priority value is used. If you select this option, you need to set the 802.1p parameter.. parameter l Copy from IP precedence: indicates that the priority is copied from the ToS field in the t he IP header of the user-side packets. If the received received packet is not an an IP packet or the packet does not carry carry the 802.1p priority, priority, the default 802.1p priority is used. If you select select this option, you need to set the Default 802.1p parameter. MTU Indicates the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IPoE packets. This parameter parameter needs to be set only only when Encapsulation Mode is set to IPoE. MRU Indicates the maximum receive unit (MRU) of PPPoE packets. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. User Name Indicates the user name that is used for PPPoE dialup. This user name must be the same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. Password Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indicates the password that is used for PPPoE dialup. This password must be the same same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description En Enab able le LCP LCP Det Detec ecti tion on This This pa para rame mete terr ne need edss tto o be be se sett o onl nly y whe when n Encapsulation is set to . Mode PPPoE l If you select this option, the t he LCP detection function is enabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system will detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link normal if the LCP request is detected. l Binding Options If you do not select this option, the LCP detection function is disabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system does not detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link abnormal. Used to bind the WAN interface to the LAN port or to the wireless SSID. NOTE Before setting the binding options, set the work mode of the LAN port to route or set the wireless SSID. The binding options can be set only after the work mode or wireless SSID is successfu successfully lly set. For details, see 3.4.1 LAN Port Work Mode and WLAN Basic Configuration. IPv4 Information IP Acqu Acquis isit itio ion nM Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he mode mode of ob obta tain inin ing g an an IPv IPv4 4 aadd ddre ress ss on th thee ONT ONT.. It It can be set to DHCP, Static, or PPPoE. If the encapsulation mode is set to IPoE, this parameter can be set to DHCP or Static. If the encapsulation mode is set to PPPoE, this parameter can be set to only PPPoE. l In DHCP mode, the IP address is dynamically obtained. l In static mode, the IP address is set statically. You need to enter the IP address, subnet mask, IP addresses of the active and standby DNS servers, and default gateway. gateway. l In PPPoE mode, you need to enter the user name and password. Enable NAT Indicates whether to enable the NAT function. NAT NA T type Specifies the NAT NAT type. It can be set set to Port-restricted cone NAT NA T or Full-cone NAT. This parameter is configurable only if the NAT function is enabled. l Port-restricted cone NAT: After an internal address A is mapped to an external address B, an external host can send packets to A by sending packets packets to B only if A has previously sent a packet packet to the host. The source IP and port number in the message sent by the host must be the same as the destination IP and port number in the previous message sent by A. l Full-cone NAT: After an internal address A is mapped to an external address B, any external host can send packets to A by sending packets to B. Issue 01 (2019 09 20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Dialing Method Indicates the PPPoE dialup method. It can be set to Automatic, Manual, or Packet trigger. Mult Mu ltic icas astt V VLA LAN N ID ID Indi Indica cate tess tthe he mult multic icas astt VLA VLAN N ID, ID, ra rang ngin ing g ffro rom m 1 to 4094 4094.. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. Vendor ID Sets the option 60 field on the DHCP client. The IP address can be obtained from the DHCP server only when the option 60 field is the same as the setting on the upper-layer DHCP server. When IP Acquisition Mode is set to DHCP, this parameter is configurable. configurable. User ID Adds the Option 61 information to the DHCP packet for a WAN port request. This parameter is used to identify a WAN port uniquely in a customer's customer's network management management domain. This parameter is configurable when IP acquisition mode is set to DHCP. IPv6 Information Prefix Pre fix Acqu Acquisi isitio tion n Mod Modee 83 Indica Indicates tes tthe he pr prefi efix x acq acquis uisitio ition n mode. mode. It can can be set set to DHCPPD, Static, or None. l DHCPv6-PD: When the parameter is set to DHCPv6-PD, the BRAS assigns a prefix to the ONT in DHCPv6 mode. l Static: When the parameter is set to Static, you need to manually enter a prefix. l None: When the parameter parameter is set to None, no prefix is obtained. l If this parameter is set to RA or Auto in an earlier version, its value will be automatically changed to DHCPv6-PD automatically after the version is upgraded to V300R019C00&V500R019C00. Issue 01 (2019 09 20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description IP Acqu Acquis isit itio ion nM Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess the the IP ac acqu quis isit itio ion n mod mode. e. It ca can n be be sset et to DHCPv6, Automatic, Static, or None. l If this parameter is set to Automatic, you need to make the prefix mask 64-bit long. The prefix mask length of the IPv6 address is similar to the subnet mask of the IPv4 address. l If this parameter is set to Static, you need to enter the IP address, primary DNS server, and secondary DNS server. The ONT address mode can be Numbered or Unnumbered. When the address mode is Numbered, the ONT WAN port has its own IPv6 GUA address. When the address mode is Unnumbered, the ONT WAN port has an LLA address but no GUA address, which is not good for network management and fault location. Therefore, the Numbered mode is recommended. l l Mult Mu ltic icas astt V VL LAN ID When the Numbered mode is used, the setting of IP Acquisition Mode is as follows: – When M=1 is set for the RA packet on the BRAS, IP addresses are obtained in DHCPv6 mode on the WAN side. Then, IP Acquisition Mode can be set to DHCPv6 or Automatic. Automatic is recommended. – When M=0 is set for the RA packet on the BRAS, IP addresses are obtained in ND (stateless address allocation) mode on the WAN side. Then, IP Acquisition Mode can be set to Automatic. When the Unnumbered mode is used, IP Acquisition Mode is set to None. The The mu multic lticaast VLAN VLAN ID range angess fr from 1 to to 409 4094 4. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. DS-Lit DSLitee Wo Worki rking ng Mo Mode de AFTR Name Indica Indicates tes tthat hat tthe he IPv4 IPv4 pa packe ckett is encap encapsul sulate ated d into into the IPv6 IPv6 packet and transmitted through IPv6 tunnel. This work work mode is only enabled for the DS-Lite solution. l Off: Indicates the DSLite work mode is disabled. l Auto: Indicates that the IP address and domain name of the peer device at the tunnel are automatically automatically obtained using RA or DHCP protocol. l Static: Indicates that the IP address and domain name information of the peer device at the tunnel are manually entered. When this mode is used, you need to enter the AFTR domain name which must be consistent with that on the BRAS. Indicates the IP address or domain name of the peer device at the tunnel. AFTR is short for address family transition router router.. Issue 01 (2019 09 20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) l 85 WAN Configuration - bridge a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se WAN > WAN Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set Mode to Bridge WAN, as shown in Figure 3-18. Figure 3-18 WAN Configuration - bridge b. Click Apply. WAN in bridge mode. Table 3-4 describes the parameters related to the WAN Table 3-4 3 -4 Parameters related to the WAN in bridge mode Parameter Description Enable WAN Encapsula Enca psulation tion Mo Mode de Indicates whether to enable the WAN connection. Indicates Indicates tthe he enc encapsul apsulation ation mode mode of a WAN interfac interface. e. It can can be set to IPoE or PPPoE. Pr Prot otoc ocol ol Type ype In Indi dica cate tess tthe he prot protoc ocol ol ty type pe of a WAN in inte terf rfac ace. e. It ca can n be be se sett tto o IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4/IPv6. WAN Mode Indicates the WAN interface mode. It can be set to Bridge WAN or Route WAN. Ser ervi vicce Ty Type Indi Indica cate tess the the ser servic vice tty ype of th thee WA WAN int inteerfa rface. ce. It It iiss alw alwaays se sett tto o INTERNET, IPTV, OTHER. Enab Enable le VLA LAN N Sele elects cts th this chec check kb box ox to se sett VLA VLAN N ID ID and and 802. 802.1 1p p prrio iori rity ty.. VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. It ranges from 1 to 4094. The VLAN ID must be the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description 802.1p Po Policy Indicates tth he 802.1p pr priority po policy. Bi Bind ndin ing g Opt Optio ions ns 86 l Use specified value: indicates that a specified priority value is used. If you select this option, you need to set the 802.1p parameter.. parameter l Copy from IP precedence: indicates that the priority is copied from the ToS field in the IP header of the user-side packets. If the received packet is not an IP packet or the packet does not carry the 802.1p priority, priority, the default 802.1p priority is used. If you select this option, you need to set the Default 802.1p parameter.. parameter Used Used to bind bind the the WAN WAN in inte terf rfac acee tto o tthe he LAN LAN por portt o orr tto o tthe he wire wirele less ss SSID. NOTE Before setting the binding options, set the work mode of the LAN port to route or set the wireless SSID. The binding options can be set only after the work mode or wireless SSID is successfu successfully lly set. For details, see 3.4.1 LAN Port Work Mode and WLAN Basic Configuration. Multic Mul ticast ast VLA VLAN N ID The mul multic ticast ast VLA VLAN N ID ranges ranges from from 1 to 4 4094 094.. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. NOTE l WAN in route mode: The ONT functions as a gateway. The IP address of the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, Static, or PPPoE. The IP address of the PC connected to the ONT can be obtained from the DHCP address pool of the ONT or can be set manually. l WAN in bridge mode: The ONT functions as a relay and does not process data. The ONT does not obtain the IP address allocated by the upper-layer device and it does not allow manual configuration of a static IP address. The IP address of the device connected to the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, PPPoE, or static. l In the case of the DHCP mode, you need to set the DHCP relay. After configuration is complete, the user-side IP address is obtained from the upper-layer device. For the detailed procedure, see 3.4.3 DHCP Server Configuration. l In the case of the PPPoE mode, the user-side IP address is obtained through PPPoE authentication of the upper-layer device. 3.3.2 DHCP Client Option Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the WAN tab, and choose DHCP Client Option Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the DHCPv4 options carried by the DHCP client for the route WAN, as shown in Figure 3-19. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-19 DHCP client option configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-5 3 -5 describes the DHCP client option configuration parameters. Table 3-5 3 -5 DHCP client option configuration parameters Parameter Description WAN name name Indi Indica cate tess tthe he name name of the the WAN po port to whi hicch the the opti option on to be configured belongs. A maximum of eight options can be configured for each WAN WAN port. Opt ptio ion n IID D Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of a WANN-si side de DHCP DHCP opti option on.. An opti option on ID uniq unique uely ly identifies an option. This parameter cannot be set to Option53 or Option55, which is mandatory in DHCP packets. Opti Op tion on ffor orma matt Indi Indica cate tess the the opt optio ion n ffor orma mat, t, whic which h ccan an be he hexa xade deci cima mall or Ba Base se64 64.. Opti Op tion on valu valuee In Indi dica cate tess tthe he valu valuee o off aan n opt optio ion n ccar arri ried ed in a pac packe kett sen sentt fro from m the the DHCP client to the DHCP server. 3.3.3 DHCP Client Request Parameter Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the WAN tab, and choose DHCP Client Request Parameter from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the request parameter list sent by the DHCP client for for the route WAN. The DHCP server returns the option values based on the request parameter list, as shown in Figure 3-20. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-20 DHCP client request parameter configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-6 3 -6 describes the request parameters sent by the DHCP client. Table 3-6 3 -6 Request parameters sent by the DHCP client Parameter Description WAN name name In Indi dica cate tess the the WAN port port used used for for ttra rans nsmi mitt ttin ing g tthe he re requ ques estt par param amet eter erss sent by the DHCP client. Opt ptio ion n IID D Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of a DH DHCP opt ptio ion. n. An op opti tio on IID D un uniq ique uely ly id ideent ntif ifie iess an option. Option request sequence Indicates the sequence of request parameters sent by the DHCP client. Value 1 indicates the highest priority. Opti Op tion on ffor orma matt Indi Indica cate tess the the opti option on ffor orma mat, t, whi which ch can can be be hexa hexade deci cima mall or Ba Base se64 64.. The The option returned by the DHCP server is always in Base64 format. If the hexadecimal format is specified for this parameter, parameter, the ONT will convert the option in the Base64 format to that in the hexadecimal format. Opti Op tion on va valu luee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he op opti tion on va valu luee in th thee spe speci cifi fied ed form format at ca carr rrie ied d in a pa pack cket et sent from the DHCP server to the DHCP client. This parameter is not configurable but available for query. query. 3.4 LAN This topic describes how to configure the LAN port through t hrough the web page. 3.4.1 LAN Port Work Mode NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1. 89 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose LAN > LAN Port Work Mode. In the pane on the right, determine whether the LAN port works in layer 3 mode, as shown in Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21 LAN Port Work Mode NOTE If the check box corresponding to the LAN port is selected, it indicates that the LAN port works in layer 3 mode, that is, the gateway mode; if the check box corresponding to the LAN port is deselected, it indicates that the LAN port works in layer 2 mode, that is, the bridge mode. By default, the check boxes corresponding to all LAN ports are deselected, that is, all LAN ports work in layer 2 mode. 2. Click Apply. 3.4.2 LAN Host Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose LAN > LAN Host Configuration. In the pane on the right, set the management IP address of the LAN host and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 3-22. Figure 3-22 LAN host configuration NOTE The IP address of the device connected to the LAN port must be in the same subnet as the management IP address. In this way, you can access an ONT through the web page and perform the query and management. You can manually set the IP address of the device connected to the LAN port to be on the same network segment as the management IP address, or start the DHCP server to set the IP address in the DHCP address pool to be on the same network segment as the management IP address. For details, see 3.4.3 DHCP Server Configuration. 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 90 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.4.3 DHCP Server Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose LAN > DHCP Server Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can can configure the LAN LAN side DHCP address address pool for the ONT that functions as a gateway gateway.. After the configuration, the PC connected to the LAN port can automatically obtain an IP address from the address pool, as shown in Figure 3-23. Figure 3-23 DHCP server configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-7 3 -7 describes the parameters related to the DHCP server. Table 3-7 3 -7 Parameters related to the DHCP server Parameter Description Enable Primary DHCP Server Indicates whether to enable the primary DHCP server. server. If the check box is selected, you can set the primary DHCP server. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 91 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Parameter Description Enable DHCP Relay Indicates whether to enable the DHCP Relay. The DHCP relay is a process in which cross-subnet forwarding of DHCP broadcast packets is implemented between between the DHCP client and the DHCP server. In this manner, the DHCP clients in different physical subnets can obtain IP addresses which are dynamically allocated from the same DHCP server. l If Mode of the WAN port is Route, the IP address of the ONT is obtained from upper-layerr DHCP servers in different upper-laye subnets and the user-side IP addresses are obtained from the DHCP address pool of the ONT. ONT. l If Mode of the WAN port is Bridge, the ONT functions as a bridge. In this way, way, the ONT does not have an IP address. The user-side IP addresses are obtained from upper-layer DHCP servers in different subnets. Enable Option 125 Indicates whether to enable the Option 125. LAN Host IP Address Indicates the ONT management address. Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the primary DHCP server. Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address in the IP address pool on the primary DHCP server. It must be in the same subnet as that of the IP address set in "3.4.2 LAN Host Configuration". Otherwise, the DHCP server fails to work normally. normally. End IP Address Indicates the end IP address in the IP address pool on the active DHCP server. It must be in the same subnet as that of the IP address set in "3.4.2 LAN Host Configuration". Otherwise, the DHCP server fails to work. Leased Time Indicates the lease time of the IP address pool on the active DHCP server. server. Options: minute, hour, day, and week. Primary DNS Server Inputs the IP address of the primary DNS server. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 92 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Parameter Description Secondary DNS Server Inputs the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Secondary Address Pool NOTE Secondary Address Pool cannot take effect together with policy route configuration. Enable Secondary DHCP Server Indicates whether to enable the secondary DHCP server. server. If the check box is selected, you can set the secondary DHCP server. IP Address Indicates the IP address of the secondary DHCP server. Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the secondary DHCP server. Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address in the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server. End IP Address Indicates the end IP address in the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server. Leased Time Indicates the lease time of the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP DHCP server. server. Options: minute, hour, day, day, and week. Option 60 Indicates the option 60 field of the secondary DHCP server. A user-side DHCP client can obtain an IP address from the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server only when the option 60 field carried by the user-side DHCP client is the same as this setting. Option 43 Indicates the option 43 field of the secondary DHCP server, identifying a TFTP server. NTP Server Inputs the IP addre address ss of the NTP server. server. Primary DNS Server Inputs the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary DNS Server Inputs the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3.4.4 DHCP Server Option Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1. 93 Click the LAN tab, and choose DHCP Server Option Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the options sent by the DHCP server on the LAN side, as shown in Figure 3-24. Figure 3-24 DHCP server option configuration 2. Click Apply. 3 -8 describes the DHCP server option configuration parameters. Table 3-8 Table 3-8 3 -8 DHCP server option configuration parameters Parameter Description Opt ptio ion n ID Indi Indica cate tess the the ID of a LANAN-si sid de DHCP opt ptio ion. n. An opti optio on ID uniq unique uely ly identifies an option. This parameter cannot be set to Option53 or Option55, which is mandatory in DHCP packets. Opti Op tion on ffor orma matt Indi Indica cate tess the the opt optio ion n ffor orma mat, t, whic which h ccan an be he hexa xade deci cima mall or Ba Base se64 64.. Opti Op tion on valu valuee In Indi dica cate tess tthe he opti option on valu valuee car carri ried ed in a pac packe kett ssen entt fro from m the the DHCP DHCP server to the DHCP client. Addr Ad dres esss poo pooll In Indi dica cate tess th thee add addre ress ss p poo ooll to whic which h the the opti option on to to be be ccon onfi figu gure red d belongs. A maximum of eight options can be configured for each address pool. 3.4.5 DHCP Static IP Configuration 1. Click the LAN tab, and choose DHCP Static IP Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set MAC Address and IP Address, as shown in Figure 3-25. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 94 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-25 DHCP static IP configuration 2. Click Apply. 3.5 PORT NOTE EG8247W do not support this web page. This topic describes how to operate port on the web page. 3.5.1 ETH 1. On the PORT tab page, choose ETH from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, set parameters mode and and speed, as shown in Figure 3-26. Figure 3-26 ETH 2. Click Apply. 3.6 IPv6 This topic describes how to perform basic and advanced configurations of the IPv6 through the Web page. 3.6.1 Default Route Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose IPv6 > Default Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, select select or deselect the Enable the Default Route option button to enable or disable the default route of the system, as shown in Figure 3-27. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-27 Default Route Configuration NOTE If an ONT fails to find a matching routing entry after receiving a packet, the WAN interface specified by the default route configuration sends the packet to a network device. Before the default route of the system is enabled, the WAN interface must obtain the IP address. Therefore, the parameters of the WAN interface must be correctly set. For details, see 3.3.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. 3.6.2 Static Route Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose IPv6 > Static Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the static route, as shown in i n Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28 Static Route Configuration 2. 95 Click Apply. Table 3-9 3 -9 lists the configuration parameters parameters for a static route. Table 3-9 3 -9 Static route parameters Parameter Description Dest Destin inat atio ion n IIP PP Pre refi fix x This This pa para rame mete terr nee needs ds to be se sett whe when n the the ob obta tain ined ed pref prefix ix is shorter than 64 bits. It is used for LAN IP address allocation. Next Hop Indicates the destination IP address of the static static route. WAN Name Indicates the WAN interface that the static route traverses. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.6.3 LAN Address Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose IPv6 > LAN Address Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can can configure the LAN LAN side address pool for the ONT that functions as a gateway gateway,, as shown in Figure 3-29. Figure 3-29 LAN Address Configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-10 3 -10 lists the LAN address configuration paramete parameters. rs. Table 3-10 3 -10 LAN address configuration parameters Parameters Description IPv6 Ad Address Indicates th the m maanagement IIP P ad address of of IP IPv6. T Th he de default va value iiss fe80::1. To configure the management IP address for IPv4, choose LAN > LAN Host Configuration. Method of obtaining prefixes Indicates the source using which the ONT LAN side assigns the PC the IPv6 address prefix. You can specify an IPv6 WAN prefix or configure a prefix statically. l WAN agent: the IPv6 address prefix is used as the IP address prefix of the connected connected PC. The corresponding corresponding Delegated WAN and Child Prefix Mask need to be configured. l Static configuration: Prefix, Preferred period, and Valid period need to be configured manually. manually. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameters Description Par areent Prefi refix x Indic ndicat atees the the pare parent ntpr preefix fix so sour urcce. Usu sual ally ly an Inte Intern rnet et--ty type pe WAN port is used as the parentprefix parentprefix source. By default, default, the first created IPv6 Internet WAN port is used as the parentprefix source. If the value is left empty, no prefix will be obtained, Ch Chil ild d Pre Prefi fix x Mas Mask k 97 which may result in service unavailability. unavailability. Used Used for for LAN LAN IP ad addr dres esss aall lloc ocat atio ion. n. Th This is pa para rame mete terr n nee eeds ds to be configured when the obtained prefix is shorter than 64 bits. For example, if the obtained prefix is 2001:db8:2222::/48, and the child prefix mask value is set to 2001:db8:1:3333::/64, the generated IPv6 address prefix is 2001:db8:2222:3333::/64. MTU Indicates the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IPoE packets. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to IPoE. DNS source on the LAN side DNS Obtaining Mode: l DNS agent l WAN port l Static configuration Enable route advertisement Indicates whether to enable the route advertisement. Enable DHCPv6 server Indicates whether to enable the DHCPv6 server. Resource allocation mode Indicates the mode in which the ONT allocates prefixes and addresses to the connected PCs, which can be automatic or manual. Address/Prefix Assignment Mode Indicates the address/prefix assignment mode. It can be set to DHCPv6 or stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC). When it is set to SLAAC, ULA Mode must be set. Other Information Assignment Mode l DHCPv6: indicates that the LAN-side host obtains addresses in DHCPv6 mode. l SLAAC: indicates that the LAN-side host obtains addresses in ND mode. In SLAAC SLAAC mode, the host automatically configures addresses. The address information contains the prefix advertised by the local router and the interface identifier of the host. If there is no router on the link, the host has to automatically configure the link local address to communicate with local nodes. Indicates the assignment mode of other information. Other information refers to the IPv6 address in payloads of packets such as DNS packets. l DHCPv6: indicates that the address is obtained in DHCPv6 mode. l SLAAC: indicates that the address is obtained in ND mode. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameters Description ULA Mode Indicates the unique local IPv6 address (ULA) mode. A ULA address starts with a prefix fd. Similar to a reserved IPv4 address, the reserved IPv6 address is used for private purpose. This is to ensure protocol consistency. This parameter can be set to Manual, Automatic, or Disabled. Disabled is recommended. l Prohibit: This function is disabled. l Automatic: The system automatically assigns addresses. l Manual: The address needs to be entered. If this option is selected, Prefix, Prefix Length, Preferred Lifetime, and Valid Lifetime also need to be set. Prefix Indicates the network address space. IPv6 uses a prefix to indicate the network address space. For example, 2001:251:e000::/48 indicates an address space with a 48-bit prefix. Pre refi fix x Leng Length th Indic ndicat atees the the pr pref efix ix le leng ngth th,, whic which h is a dec decimal imal val alue ue.. It sp speeci ciffie iess the number of left-most bits used to form a prefix in an address. The address prefix is expressed in the "IPv6 address/prefix length" format. For example, 2001:251:e000::/48 indicates an address space with a 48-bit prefix. Pr Pref efer erre red d Lif Lifet etim imee Indi Indica cate tess the the per perio iod d of tim timee for for whic which h a val valid id add addre ress ss is is in th thee preferred state. state. When the preferred preferred lifetime expires, expires, the address becomes out of date. date. Valid lid Lif Lifeetim time Indic ndicat atees tthe he peri perio od o off ti tim me ffor or whic which h an an add addre ress ss is vali valid. d. The valid lifetime must be longer than the preferred lifetime. When the valid lifetime expires, the address becomes invalid. 3.6.4 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration In the navigation tree on the left, choose IPv6 > DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can can assign an IP address address to a MAC address using using the interface ID and IPv6 GUA address. The IPv6 GUA address is a combination of the interface i nterface ID and prefix configured on the LAN side, as shown in Figure 3-30. Figure 3-30 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 99 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.6.5 DHCPv6 Information NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. In the navigation tree on the left, choose IPv6 > DHCPv6 Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the total number of addresses, the remaining number of IP addresses, the DUID, and IPv6 address/prefix, as shown in Figure 3-31. Figure 3-31 DHCPv6 information 3.7 WLAN This topic describes how to perform basic and advanced configurations of the WLAN through the web page. 3.7.1 2.4G Basic Network Settings 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose 2.4G Basic Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, pane, configure the basic parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 3-32. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 100 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-32 2.4G basic network settings 2. Click Apply. Table 3-11 describes the basic parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network. Table 3-11 Basic wireless network configurations Parameter Description Enable WLAN Indicates whether to enable the wireless network. The following parameters can be set only when the wireless network is enabled. SSID Name Idifferentiate ndicates the different namrent e of wireless the wirelnetworks. ess networIt k.consists It is usedoftoa diffe maximum of 32 characters, without Tab character. A default SSID1, named WirelessNet is created after the creation of an ONT.. The system can configure up to four SSIDs at a time and ONT cannot assign IP addresses to Wi-Fi terminals by SSID. Enable SSID Specifies whether to enable the connection. Number of Associated Associated Devices Specifies the number of STAs. It ranges from 1 to 32. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Broadcast SSID Indicates whether to enable or hide broadcast. l If the option box is selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is enabled. enabled. The ONT periodically periodically broadcasts the SSID, SSID, that is, the name of the wireless network. In this way, any STA can search for the wireless network. l If the option box is not selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is disabled. disabled. The SSID is hidden, hidden, and the STA cannot search for the wireless network. The SSID can be obtained only through a request. Enable WMM Specifies whether to enable Wi-Fi multimedia. Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he au auth then entic ticat atio ion n mod modee ffor or th thee ST STA tto o req reque uest st access to the wireless network. The mode can be Open, Shared, WPA PreSharedKey, WPA2 WPA2 PreSharedKey, P reSharedKey, WPA/ WPA2 PreSharedKey, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise, or PA/WP PA/WPA2 A2 Ent Enterprise. erprise. It is set to Open by default, that is, the STA can access the network without authentication. Encr Encryp ypti tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he encr encryp ypti tion on mo mode de for th thee S ST TA to to re reque quest acce ccess to the wireless network. The encryption mode and encryption parameters vary with the authentication mode. mode. l If the authentication mode is set to Open, the encryption mode can be set to None or WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to Shared, the encryption is WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to WPA PreSharedKey WPA2 PreSharedKey, WPA/ WPA2 PreSharedKey, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise or WP WPA/WPA2 A/WPA2 Enterprise Enterpris e, the encryption mode can be set to AES, TKIP, or TKIP&AES . Enable WPS Specifies whether to enable the WPS function. WPS Mode Indicates the WPS mode which supports automatic configuration of the network name, that is, the service set identifier (SSID), and the WPA security key. With WPS, users do not need to keep lengthy passwords to achieve secure connection. Specifically, Specifically, the secure connection can be achieved by three modes, which are PBC, PIN, and AP PIN. l In PBC mode, the button is pressed to achieve secure WPS connection. l In PIN mode, the STA PIN is entered on an ONT to achieve secure WPS connection. l In AP PIN mode, the PIN generated by an ONT is entered to achieve secure WPS connection. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 102 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.7.2 2.4G Advanced Network Settings 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose 2.4G Advanced Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the advanced parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 3-33. Figure 3-33 2.4G advanced network settings 2. Click Apply. 3 -12 describes the Wi-Fi parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network. Table 3-12 Table 3-12 3 -12 Wireless network advance parameters Parameter Description TX Power Indicates the transmit optical power of wireless signals. It can be set to 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, or 100%. The larger the value, the better the coverage of wireless signals. Regu Regula lato tory ry Do Doma main in Channel Indi Indica cate tess the the co coun untr try y co code de of th thee wi wire rele less ss netw networ ork. k. Indicates the channel of the wireless network. The channel varies with the value of Regulatory Domain. Channel Width Indicates the wireless channel width. It can be set to Auto 20/40 MHz, 20 MHz or 40 MHz. Mode Indicates the supported wireless network mode. It can be set to 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11b/g, or 802.11b/g/n . DTIM Period Indicates the delivery period of the delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). The value ranges from 1 to 255, and the default value is 1. Beacon P Peeriod Indicates tth he de delivery pe period of of th the be beacon. T Th he be beacon is is us used to contact other access point devices or network control devices. The value ranges from 20 ms to 1000 ms, and the default value is 100 ms. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description RTS T Th hreshold Indicates tth he rreequest tto o se send (R (RTS) th threshold. It It iiss us used to to avoid conflicts in data transmission in the wireless LAN. The smaller the RTS threshold, the higher the transmission frequency of RTS packets, and the faster of the system recovers from an interruption or conflict. However, However, more bandwidths are used, which affects affects the throughput of other network data packets. The value ranges from 1 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. Fragmenta Frag mentation tion Thresho Threshold ld Indic Indicates ates the fr fragme agment nt threshold threshold.. When When the size size of of a packet packet is is greater than this threshold, the packet will be fragmented. If the transmission of fragments is interrupted, only the parts that are not successfully transmitted need to be retransmitted. The value ranges from 256 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. 3.7.3 5G Basic Network Settings NOTE HG8245Q , HG8247Q , LS1035V, HG8245V, HS8245W, EG8247W and HG8245Q2 support this web page. 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose 5G Basic Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure configure the basic parameters of the 5G Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 3-34. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-34 5G basic network settings 2. Click Apply. Table 3-13 3 -13 describes the 5G basic Wi-Fi network settings. Table 3-13 3 -13 5G basic network settings Parameter Description Enable WLAN Indicates whether to enable the wireless network. The following parameters can be set only when the wireless network is enabled. SSID Name Indicates the name of the wireless network. It is used to differentiate different different wireless networks. It consists of a maximum of 32 characters, without space or Tab character. A default SSID1, named WirelessNet is created after the creation of an ONT. The system can configure up to four SSIDs at a time and cannot assign IP addresses to Wi-Fi terminals by SSID. Enable SSID Specifies whether to enable the connection. Number of Specifies the number of STAs. It ranges from 1 to 32. Associated Devices Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Broadcast SSID Indicates whether to enable or hide broadcast. l If the option box is selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is enabled. enabled. The ONT periodically periodically broadcasts the SSID, SSID, that is, the name of the wireless network. In this way, any STA can search for the wireless network. l If the option box is not selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is disabled. disabled. The SSID is hidden, hidden, and the STA cannot search for the wireless network. The SSID can be obtained only through a request. Enable WMM Specifies whether to enable Wi-Fi multimedia. Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he au auth then entic ticat atio ion n mod modee ffor or th thee ST STA tto o req reque uest st access to the wireless network. The mode can be Open, Shared, WPA PreSharedKey, WPA2 PreSharedKey, WPA/ WPA2 PreSharedKey, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise, or PA/WPA2 Enterprise. It is set to open by default, that is, the STA can access the network without authentication. Encr Encryp ypti tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he encr encryp ypti tion on mo mode de for th thee S ST TA to to re reque quest acce ccess to the wireless network. The encryption mode and encryption parameters vary with the authentication mode. mode. l If the authentication mode is set to Open, the encryption mode can be set to None or WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to Shared, the encryption is WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to WP WPA A PreSharedKey P reSharedKey, WPA2 PreSharedKey, WP WPA/WPA2 A/WPA2 PreSharedKey P reSharedKey, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise or WPA/WPA2 Enterprise , the encryption mode can be set to AES, TKIP, or TKIP&AES. Enable WPS Specifies whether to enable the WPS function. WPS Mode Indicates the WPS mode which supports automatic configuration of the network name, that is, the service set identifier (SSID), and the WPA security key. With WPS, users do not need to keep lengthy passwords to achieve secure connection. Specifically, Specifically, the secure connection can be achieved by three modes, which are PBC, PIN, and AP PIN. l In PBC mode, the button is pressed to achieve secure WPS connection. l In PIN mode, the STA PIN is entered on an ONT to achieve secure WPS connection. l In AP PIN mode, the PIN generated by an ONT is entered to achieve secure WPS connection. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 106 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.7.4 5G Advanced Network Settings NOTE HG8245Q , HG8247Q , LS1035V, HG8245V, HS8245W ,EG8247W and HG8245Q2 support this web page. 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose 5G Advanced Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the advanced parameters of the 5G Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 3-35. Figure 3-35 5G advanced network settings 2. Click Appl Apply y. 5GTable 3-14 describes the 5G advanced network settings. Table 3-14 3 -14 5G advanced network settings Parameter Description TX Power Indicates the transmit optical power of wireless signals. It can be set to 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, or 100%. The larger the value, the better the coverage of wireless signals. Regu Regula lato tory ry Do Doma main in Indi Indica cate tess the the co coun untr try y co code de of th thee wi wire rele less ss netw networ ork. k. Channel Indicates the channel of the wireless network. The channel varies with the value of Regulatory Domain. Channel Width Indicates the wireless channel width. It can be set to Auto 20/40 MHz, 20 MHz, 40 MHz or Auto 20/40/80 MHz. Mode Indicates the supported wireless network mode. It can be set to 802.11a, 802.11n, 802.11a/n , or 802.11a/n/ac . DTIM Period Indicates the delivery period of the delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). The value ranges from 1 to 125, and the default value is 1. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Beacon P Peeriod Indicates tth he de delivery pe period of of th the be beacon. T Th he be beacon is is us used to contact other access point devices or network control devices. The value ranges from 20 ms to 1000 ms, and the default value is 100 ms. RTS T Th hreshold Indicates tth he rreequest tto o se send (R (RTS) th threshold. It It iiss us used to to avoid conflicts in data transmission in the wireless LAN. The smaller the RTS threshold, the higher the transmission frequency of RTS packets, and the faster of the system recovers from an interruption or conflict. However, However, more bandwidths are used, which affects affects the throughput of other network data packets. The value ranges from 1 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. Fragmenta Frag mentation tion Thresho Threshold ld Indic Indicates ates the fr fragme agment nt threshold threshold.. When When the size size of of a packet packet is is greater than this threshold, the packet will be fragmented. If the transmission of fragments is interrupted, only the parts that are not successfully transmitted need to be retransmitted. The value ranges from 256 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. 3.7.5 Automatic WiFi Shutdown NOTE HS3025, HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245A ,EG8247W and HG8245Q support this web page. 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose Automatic WiFi Shutdown from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the scheduled Wi-Fi shutdown time segment, to enable the Wi-Fi network to be automatically shut down when the Wi-Fi network is not in use, as shown in Figure 3-36. Figure 3-36 Automatic WiFi shutdown 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 108 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.7.6 WiFi Coverage Management NOTE HS3025, HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245A, EG8247W and HG8245Q support this web page. 1. Click the WLAN tab, and choose WiFi Coverage Management from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, specify the SSID used for smart WiFi coverage and add the identified external AP devices to t o the WiFi network, configure roaming and switching conditions. as shown in Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38. Figure 3-37 Wi-Fi Parameter Configuration Figure 3-38 Wi-Fi Network Management 2. Click Apply. 3.7.7 Z-Wave Control NOTE LS1035V/EG8247W does support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 109 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) On the WLAN tab page, choose Z-Wave Control from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, set Z-Wave Z-Wave control, as shown in Figure 3-39. Figure 3-39 Z-Wave control 3.8 Security This topic describes how to configure the security through the web page 3.8.1 Firewall Level Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the Security tab, and choose Firewall Level Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, set the firewall level, as shown in Figure 3-40. Figure 3-40 Firewall level configuration 2. Click Apply. 3.8.2 IP Filter Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Security > IP Filter Configuration. In the pane on the right, enable enable the IP address filter filter function. After selecting selecting the filter mode, click New. Then, in the dialog box that is displayed, configure the rule for filtering IP addresses from the WAN interface to the LAN port, as shown in Figure 3-41. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-41 IP Filter Configuration 2. Click Apply. The IP address filter function is a security mechanism configured on the residential gateway. It enables or disables all or partial ports in an Intranet IP address segment to communicate with all or partial ports in an Extranet IP address segment. The IP address filter configuration is used to limit communication between an intranet device and an extranet device. Table 3-15 3 -15 describes the parameters related to the IP address filter. Table 3-15 3 -15 Parameters related to the IP address filter Parameter Description Enable IP Filter Indicates whether to enable the IP address filte terr function. Filter Mode Indicates the IP address filter rule of the blacklist or whitelist. l Blacklist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed to pass. l Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in i n the filter rule list is allowed to pass. l Hybrid: indicates that packets are filtered based on the upstream or downstream direction. Certain IP packets in the upstream or downstream direction are (not) allowed to pass through. Only one of the preceding modes can be selected. Rule Name Indicates the name of a rule. This parameter is mandatory and consists of characters and numbers only. only. A rule name must be unique. Protocol Indicates the type of the protocol, which may be TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ALL. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Direction Indicates the direction to which the filter rule applies. l Bidirectional: This value is available only when Filter Mode is Blacklist or Whitelist. The value cannot be changed. l Upstream: When this value is selected in the hybrid mode, the filter rule applies to the upstream direction. In the hybrid filter mode, only Upstream or Downstream can be selected. l Downstream: When this value is selected in the hybrid mode, the filter rule applies to the downstream direction. Priority Indicates the priority of the IP filter rule. This parameter is configurable only when Filter Mode is set to Hybrid. The value ranges from 0 to 255. A smaller value indicates a higher priority.. The default value is 255. priority LAN-side Start IP Address Indicates the start IPaddress on the LANside. LAN-side End IP Address Indicates the endIPaddress on the LANside. LAN-side Port Indicates the port ID on the LAN side. This parameter can be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP. WAN AN-s -sid idee IIP P Add Addre ress ss Indi Indica cate tess tthe he IP ad addr dres esss on on the the WAN si side de.. WAN-side Port Indicates the ID of the WAN side port. This parameter can be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP. Action Indicates the IP filter action. l Accept: accepts packets that meet the IP filter rule. l Drop: drops packet that meet the IP filter rule. 3.8.3 MAC Filter Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > MAC Filter Configuration. In the pane on the right, after after enabling MAC filter and and selecting the filter mode, mode, click New. On the dialog box that is displayed, configure the MAC filter rule for the PC to access the Internet, as shown in Figure 3-42. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 112 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-42 MAC Filter Configuration 2. Click Apply. The MAC address lists of PCs in the network are saved on the ONT. Configuring MAC filter rules enables the PCs that conform to the rules to access the Internet service or disables the PCs that do not conform to the rules to access the Internet service. A PC may have more than one IP addresses but a unique MAC address. Therefore, configuring MAC filter rules effectively controls the Internet service access access rights of PCs in a LAN. Table 3-16 3 -16 describes the parameters related to the MAC filter. Table 3-16 3 -16 Parameters related to the MAC address filter Parameter Description Enable MAC filter Indicates whether to enable the MAC address filter function. Filter Mode Indicates the MAC address filter rule of the blacklist or whitelist. l Blacklist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed to pass. l Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is allowed to pass. The filter mode is global config mode. Thus, the blacklist and whitelist mode cannot be used at the same time. Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC address filter rule. 3.8.4 WLAN MAC Filter Configuration NOTE LS1015, LS2025, HS3025, HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245A and HG8245Q support this web page. 1. Click the Security tab, and choose WLAN MAC Filter Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, select Enable WAN MAC filter, set the Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 113 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) filter mode, and click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, configure the SSID-based MAC address filter rule, as shown in Figure 3-43. Figure 3-43 WLAN MAC filter configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-17 3 -17 describes the configuration parameters for wireless network MAC filtering. Table 3-17 3 -17 Parameters for wireless network MAC filtering Parameter Description Enable WLAN MAC filter Enables or disables the WLAN MAC filter function. Filter mode Indicates the MAC filter mode. It can be set to Blacklist or Whitelist. l Blacklist: forbids data packets that match rules in the blacklist to pass through. l Whitelist: allows data packets that match rules in the whitelist to pass through. The blacklist or whitelist mode is a global configuration. The two modes cannot be used at the same time. SSID index Indicates the SSID index of the WLAN for which MAC address filtering is configured. Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC filter rules. 3.8.5 Parental Control Configuration NOTE HG8245H/HG8245H(5dBi)do not support this web page. Click the Security tab, and choose Parental Control Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, configure different constraints for the network surfing time and website access on working days and holidays. In this way, their children are allowed Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 114 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) to access networks in specified time segments and free from age inappropriate contents, as shown in Figure 3-44. Figure 3-44 Parental Control Configuration NOTE Configure the template by following the instructions provided in the wizard. You can click Help in the upper right to view the online help about the template configuration if required. 3.8.6 URL Filter Configuration NOTE LS1035V/EG8247W does support this web page. On the Security tab page, choose URL Filter Configuration from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, select Enable URL Filter, set the filter mode, and click NEW. In the dialog box that is displayed, configure configure the URL to be filtered, filtered, as shown in Figure 3-45. Figure 3-45 URL filter configuration 3.8.7 DoS Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 1. 115 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > DoS Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the DoS attack-preventive configuration, as shown in Figure 3-46. Figure 3-46 DoS Configuration 2. Click Apply. Denial of service (DoS) attack is a network-based attack that denies users from accessing the Internet. The DoS attack initiates a large number of network connections, making the server or the program running on the server break down or server resources exhaust or denying users to access the Internet service. As a result, the network service fails. Table 3-18 3 -18 describes the parameters related to the DoS. Table 3-18 3 -18 Parameters related to the DoS Parameter Description Prevent SYN Flood Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent SYN flooding attack. In the attack, several source hosts send SYN packets to a destination host. host. After receiving the SYN ACK packets from the destination host, the source hosts do not respond. In this case, the destination host establishes many connection queues for the source hosts and maintains these queues all the time because no ACK response is received. As a result, many resources are used and the destination host fails to provide normal services for normal connections. Prevent ICMP Echo Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent ICMP echo attack. In the attack, many ICMP echo packets are sent to a destination host within a short time. As a result, the network is congested or the resources of the host are exhausted. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 116 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Parameter Description Prevent IIC CMP Re Redirection At Attack Indicates wh whether tto o en enable tth he pr prevent ICMP redirect attack. In the attack, many ICMP redirect packets are sent to a destination host within a short time. As a result, the network is congested or the resources of the host are exhausted. Prevent LAND Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent LAND attack. Prevent Smurf Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent Smurf attack. Prevent WinNuke Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent WinNuke attack Prevent Ping Sweep Attack Indicates whether to enable the prevent Sweep attack. 3.8.8 Precise Device Access Control Click Security tab, and choose Precise Device Access Control in the navigation tree on the left. Click New. In the displayed window, set LAN port, SSID or WAN port information, including Priority, Protocol and Mode,as shown in Figure 3-47. Figure 3-47 Parental Control 3.8.9 Device Access Control 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > Device Access Control. In the pane on the right, configure the rule of ONT access control, as shown in Figure 3-48. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 117 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible for any related subsequences. Figure 3-48 Device Access Control 2. Click Apply. 3.8.10 WAN Access Control Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Security > WAN Access Control Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters of the WAN access control, as shown in Figure 3-49 Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible for any related subsequences. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 118 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-49 WAN Access Control Configuration 2. Click Apply. 3.9 Route This topic describes how to configure the default route and static route through the web page. NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 3.9.1 Default Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Route > Default Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, select select or deselect the Default Route option button to enable or disable the default route of the system, as shown in Figure 3-50. Figure 3-50 Default Route Configuration NOTE If an ONT fails to find a matching routing entry after receiving a packet, the WAN interface specified by the default route configuration sends the packet to a network device. Before the default route of the system is enabled, the WAN interface must obtain the IP address. Therefore, the parameters of the WAN interface must be correctly set. For details, see 3.3.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.9.2 Static Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Route > Static Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the static route, as shown in i n Figure 3-51. Figure 3-51 Static Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-19 3 -19 describes the parameters related to the static route. Table 3-19 3 -19 Parameters related to the static route Parameter Description Address format Indicates the format of an address, which can be in IP address or domain name format. When both the destination IP address and the domain name are configured, only the destination IP address takes effect. IP Address Indicates the destination IP address of the static route. This parameter must be configured configured when the IP address format format is specified for Address format. Domain name Indicates the domain name of the static route. This parameter must be configured when the domain name formats is specified for Address Format. The wildcard domain names in the following formats are supported: *.abc.com, abc.com.*, and abc.*.com. The wildcard domain names in the following format are not supported: *abc.com, abc*.com, and a*c.com. Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the static route. Gateway Indicates the gateway IP address of the static route. WAN Name Indicates the WAN interface that the route travels through. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.9.3 Dynamic Route Configuration 1. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Route > Dynamic Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the dynamic route, as shown in Figure 3-52. Figure 3-52 Dynamic Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-20 3 -20 describes the parameters related to the dynamic route. Table 3-20 3 -20 Parameters related to the dynamic route Parameter Description Enable RIP Controls whether the RIP function configured on the WAN port takes effect. effect. Protocol Type Indicates the RIP protocol type. It is used for dynamic route learning and route advertisement. l RIPv1: does not support packet authentication. When this protocol type is selected, selected, the authentication mode automatically changes to None. Mode l RIPv2: supports packet authentication. l RIPv1_v2: supports both RIPv1 and RIPv2. Indicates the RIP protocol working mode. Its values are Active and Passive. l Active: advertises and automatically learns routes. l Passive: only automatically learns routes but does not advertise routes. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he pa pack cket et au auth then enti tica cati tion on mo mode de.. It It iiss us used ed for for authentication on route learning and advertisement packets. Key 121 l When RIPv1 is selected, the authentication mode cannot be edited and is set to None. l When RIPv1_v2 is selected, the authentication mode works for only RIPv2 and RIPv1 packets are not authenticated. Indicates the key required for packet authentication. l It cannot be set if the authentication mode is None. l It is mandatory if the authentication mode is Plaintext, MD5, or HMAC-SHA256 . NOTE When the authentication mode is Plaintext, the input plaintext is displayed as asterisks (*). Interface Name Indicates the name of a WAN port, which is used to associate a port configured using a dynamic route. By default, default, it is the name of every WAN port. 3.9.4 Policy Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Route > Policy Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the policy route, as shown in i n Figure 3-53. Figure 3-53 Policy Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. NOTE Unbind egress and Default rule are displayed only when a route WAN is configured. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 122 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.9.5 VLAN Binding Configuration 1. Choose Route > VLAN Binding Configuration from the navigation tree. In the displayed right pane, click the port for which VLAN binding needs to be configured. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the port-VLAN binding relationship, as shown in Figure 3-54. Figure 3-54 VLAN binding configuration 2. Click Apply. NOTE Do not bind a user-side VLAN to a WAN port that has the same multiple VLANs. 3.9.6 Service Route Configuration 1. Click the Route tab. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Service Route Configuration. In the right pane, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set related service route parameters, as shown in Figure 3-55. Figure 3-55 Service Route Configuration NOTE The configuration takes effectWAN. when the device works in the bridge mode, and the corresponding WAN must be bridgin bridging-type g-type 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 123 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.9.7 Routing Table Click the Route tab, and choose Routing Table from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, routing information of the device is displayed, including the destination IP address, destination subnet mask, gateway, and outgoing interface, as shown in Figure 3-56. Figure 3-56 Routing table 3.10 Forward Rules This topic describes how to configure the DMZ, port mapping, and port trigger through the web page. 3.10.1 DMZ Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Forward Rules > DMZ Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the DMZ, as shown in Figure 3-57. Figure 3-57 DMZ Configuration 2. Click Apply. The demilitarized zone (DMZ) is a technology that enables the ONT to forward all received packets through a specified specified internal server. server. The The technology enables a computer in the LAN to be completely exposed to all users on the Internet Internet or enables the mutual mutual communication without restrictions between a host with a specified IP address and other users or other servers on the Internet. In this way, many applications can run on the host with the specified IP address. The host with the specified IP address receives all connections and files that can be identified. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 124 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) If the LAN-side device does not provide website service or other network services, do not set the device to a DMZ host because all ports of a DMZ host are opened to the Internet. Table 3-21 3 -21 describes the parameters related to the DMZ. Table 3-21 3 -21 Parameters related to the DMZ Parameter Description Enable DMZ Indicates whether to enable the DMZ. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface. If the WAN interface is not in the port mapping table, the application requests from the WAN connection are directly forwarded to the host in the DMZ. Host Address Indicates the IP address of the DMZ host. 3.10.2 Port Mapping Configuration Port mapping indicates that the Intranet server is allowed to be open to the Extranet (for example, the Intranet provides the Extranet with a WWW server or FTP server). Port mapping is to map the Intranet host IP address and port ID to Extranet IP address and corresponding port ID so that users from from Extranets can access access the Intranet server server.. With po port rt mapping, the users cannot see the Intranet IP address and they see the Extranet IP address. Navigation Path 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Forward Rules > Port Mapping Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to port mapping, as shown in Figure 3-58. Figure 3-58 Port Mapping Configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 125 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Click Apply. Configuration Example Enable the packets sent from the WAN side to the ONT whose the destination WAN port number is 2000 to be forwarded to the LAN-side PC whose IP address is 192.168.100.20, and the port number is changed to 3000. Parameter Description Table 3-22 3 -22 describes the parameters related to port mapping. Table 3-22 3 -22 P Parameters arameters related to port mapping Parameter Description Type It can be set to User-defined or Application. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Application The following protocols and applications can be used on the WAN side. l l Domain Name Server(DNS) l FTP Server IPSEC l Mail(POP3) l Mail(SMTP) l PPTP l Real Player 8 Plus l Secure Shell Server(SSH) l Secure Web Server(HTTPS) l SNMP l SNMP Trap l Telnet Server l TFTP Server l TFTP l Web Server(HTTP) En Enab able le Port Port Mapp Mappin ing g Indi Indica cate tess w whe heth ther er to en enab able le port port mapp mappin ing. g. Mapping Name Indicates the name of the port mapping rule. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface where port mapping is enabled. Internal Host Indicates the IP address of the host to which the port is mapped. Protocol Indicates the protocol type of port mapping packet, which may be TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Star Startt E Ext xter erna nall P Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess tthe he dest destin inat atio ion n ssta tart rt port port of th thee eext xter erna nall d dat ataa pac packe ket. t. End End E Ex xter ternal nal Po Port Indi Indica cate tess the the de dest stin inat atio ion n en end por portt of of tthe he exte exterrnal nal dat dataa pa packet. ket. Star Startt Inte Intern rnal al Po Port rt Indi Indica cate tess the the in inte tern rnal al dest destin inat atio ion n st star artt port port of th thee port port mapp mappin ing g packet. End End IIn nter ternal nal P Po ort Indi Indica cate tess tthe he in inte terrna nall d deest stin inaati tio on end end port port of th thee por port ma mappin pping g packet. Start External Source Port Indicates the source start port of the external data packet. End Externa Externall Source Source Port Port Indicates Indicates the so source urce end port port of the extern external al data data packet. packet. External Source IP Indicates the source IP address of the external data packet. Address Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3.10.3 Port Trigger Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Forward Rules > Port Trigger Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the port trigger, as shown in Figure 3-59. Figure 3-59 Port Trigger Configuration 2. Click Apply. The port trigger indicates that a specific Extranet port is automatically enabled when a corresponding Intranet port sends a packet and the packet is mapped to the Intranet port on the host.A specific mapping packet is sent from the ONT through the Intranet so that specific packets of the Extranet Extranet can be mapped to the corresponding host. A specified port on the gateway firewall is open to some applications for remote access. The port trigger can dynamically enable the open port of the firewall. Table 3-23 3 -23 describes the parameters related to the port trigger. Table 3-23 3 -23 Parameters related to the port trigger Parameter Description Enab Enable le Por ortt Tri Trigg gger er Indi Indica cate tess w wh het ethe herr to to eena nabl blee th the por portt ttrrig igge gerr. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface where the port trigger is enabled. Trigger P Prrotocol Indicates tth he pr protocol tty ype of of th the po port ttrrigger pa packet, wh which may be TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Open Protocol Indicates the protocol type of the open data packet. Sta tarrt T Trrigge iggerr P Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess the the de dest stin inat atio ion n ssta tarrt por portt of of tthe he por port ttrrig igge gerr pac packe ket. t. End End Trigge iggerr Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess the the de dest stin inat atio ion n end end por port of th thee por port trig trigge gerr pa pack ckeet. Start Op Open P Po ort Indicates tth he de destination st start p po ort o off th the o op pen pa packet. End O Op pen Port Indicates tth he destination end po port o off the open pa packet. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 128 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.11 Network Applications This topic describes how to configure the USB, ALG, UPnP UPnP,, and ARP through the web page. 3.11.1 USB Application Navigation Path NOTE HG8240A does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Network Applications > USB Application. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to FTP downloading to share the FTP file of the ONT, as shown in Figure 3-60. Figure 3-60 USB Application NOTE FTP server configuration supports only English. The file time of an ONT is in the UNIX format. In Windows OS, the file time displayed may be different from the actual time for FTP access. 2. Click Download to download files from the FTP server to the USB storage device. Configuration Example Configure the USB related parameters to share the contents on the USB storage device. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 129 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 1. Insert Insert the USB storage storage de device vice to the ONT tthat hat provid provides es a USB port. If No USB Device is displayed in USB Device, no USB storage device is identified. Remove and re-insert the USB storage device. 2. Select Enable FTP Server, and specify User Name and Password. 3. Choose Security > ONT Access Control Configuration, and select Enable the LANSide PC to Access the ONT Through FTP and Enable the WAN-Side PC to Access the ONT Through FTP. Click Apply. 4. Enter ftp://192.1 ftp://192.168.10 68.100.1 0.1 in the aaddre ddress ss bar bar to visit the USB USB storag storagee device. device. 192.168.100.1 is the IP address used for ONT management. Parameter Description 3 -24 describes the parameters related to the USB. Table 3-24 Table 3-24 3 -24 Parameters related to the USB Parameter Description FTP Client Configuration FTP URL Indicates the path of the file downloaded through FTP. Port ID Indicates the FTP port number. It is set to 21 by default. Generally,, the setting is not required. Generally User Name Indicates the user name for connecting to the FTP server. If the FTP server supports anonymous login, the setting is not required. Password Indicates the password for connecting to the FTP server. If the FTP server supports anonymous login, the setting is not required. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Path Indicates the path for saving the FTP-downloaded file to the external USB device. If the path is not entered, the path specified in Download URL is used by default. FTP Server Configuration Enab Enable le FTP Serve rver Enab Enable less tthe he FTP se serv rver er when when th thee ONT ONT se serves ves as an FT FTP server. User Name Sets the user name of the FTP server. This user name is required when another FTP client logs in to the FTP server. server. Password Sets the password of the FTP server. This password is required when another FTP client logs in to the FTP server. server. Port ID Indicates the FTP port number. It is set to 21 by default. Generally,, the setting is not required. Generally USB Device Indicates the drive of the external USB device for saving the file downloaded through FTP. Root Path Indicates the path for saving shared files when the ONT serves as a server. 3.11.2 Home Sharing NOTE HG8245Q/HG8247H (PTVDF)/EG8247W support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab, and choose Home Sharing from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the home sharing settings, as shown in Figure 3-61. Figure 3-61 Home sharing Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 131 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Click Apply. NOTE l To enable a home printer, connect it to the USB port of the home gateway (ONT). The IP address of this printer is the IP address of the ONT. This printer can be used after it is searched out and its driver is installed. Do not remove and re-insert the USB storage device in use, because this may damage files in it. A file (such as PDF) may fail to be printed in the Windows OS in any of the following cases: l The Windows domain is used and user domain fails to be authenticated. l An alias is used to access the printer. l No authentication authentication mod modee is used for a printer printer.. This issue occurs because of application program incompatibility. If this issue occurs, check your Windows or printer setting settings. s. l If the security software is installed on the PC, which leads to Samba user name authentication failure for the first login attempt, authenticate the user name again or use the Samba function in anonymity. 3.11.3 Media Sharing NOTE HG8245Q/HG8247H (PTVDF)/EG8247W support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab, and choose Media Sharing from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the media sharing settings, as shown in Figure 3-62. Figure 3-62 Media sharing 2. Click Apply. 3.11.4 ALG Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Network Applications > ALG Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the FTP or TFTP, TFTP, as shown in Figure 3-63. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 132 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-63 ALG Configuration 2. Click Apply. When the NAT NAT function is enabled, the application level gateway (ALG) function needs to be enabled to ensure that some application software and hardware can be normally used. 3.11.5 UPnP Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Network Applications > UPnP Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the UPnP, UPnP, as shown in Figure 3-64. Figure 3-64 UPnP Configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 133 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Click Apply. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is the name of a group of protocols. The UPnP supports zero configuration networking and automatic discovery of different network devices. If the UPnP is enabled, the UPnP-enabled device can be dynamically connected to the network to obtain the IP address, obtain the transfer performance, discover other devices, and learn the performance of the the other devices. The UPnP-enabled device or canother be automatically automatically disconnected from network, without affecting the device devices. When the UPnP is enabled, the LAN-side PC automatically finds the ONT, which is considered as a peripheral device of the PC and is plug-and-play. plug-and-play. After running application software on the PC, port mapping entries are automatically generated on the ONT through the UPnP protocol, thus improving the running speed. 3.11.6 ARP Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Network Applications > ARP Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the resolution rule between a MAC address and an IP address, as shown in Figure 3-65. Figure 3-65 ARP Configuration 2. Click Apply. Static ARP means to manually add an ARP entry on an ONT. A static ARP never ages and can only be deleted manually. If the mapping between the IP address and MAC address of the peer device is available, available, configuring a static static ARP entry benefits benefits a lot. For example, the dynamic ARP entry learning is omitted during device communication and the static ARP entry prevents a device from learning an incorrect ARP entry in the case of malicious attacks. 3.11.7 Portal Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose Portal Configuration from the navigation tree. In the right pane, enable/disable the portal function and set the redirection URL addresses for different types of devices, as shown in Figure 3-66. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 134 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-66 Portal configuration 2. Click Apply. If the type of the device that you use is not configured with a URL address or the device type cannot be identified, the system redirects to the default URL address upon the first access to the Internet. 3.11.8 DDNS Configuration 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose DDNS Configuration from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure DDNS parameters, including Service Provider , Host Name, Service Port, Domain Name, Username , and Password, as shown in Figure 3-67. Figure 3-67 DDNS configuration 2. Click Apply. Dynamic domain name service (DDNS) associates a static domain name with the dynamic IP address of its host. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 135 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Assume that server A provides HTTP or FTP service and it is connected to the Internet using routers. If server A obtains an IP address through DHCP DHCP,, or server A is connected to the Internet through PPPoE, PPTP, or L2TP, the IP address is a dynamic IP address. That is, its IP address may change each time when server A initializes its connection to the Internet. The mapping between the domain name and IP address provided by the domain name service (DNS) server is static, the mapping not update when theInternet IP address changes. Therefore, when the IPand address of serverdoes A changes, users on the cannot access server A with domain names. With DDNS, which associates a static domain name with the dynamic IP address of its host, users on the Internet can access the server only with domain names. Table 3-25 3 -25 describes the DDNS configuration parameters. Table 3-25 3 -25 Parameters related to DDNS Configuration Parameter Description Enable DDNS Indicates whether to enable the DDNS. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN port. Service Provider DDNS service provider. It can be set to dyndns, dyndns-static, dyndns-custom, qdns, qdns-static and qnudip. Service Port Indicates the service port of DDNS. Domain Name Indicates the domain name provided by DDNS service provider. User Name Indicates the user name of DDNS account. Password Indicates the password of DDNS account. Encryption Mode Only BASE64 encryption is supported. 3.11.9 IGMP Configuration 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose IGMP Configuration from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure the IGMP parameters, as shown in Figure 3-68. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 136 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-68 IGMP configuration 2. Click Apply. The IGMP function of WAN ports can be enabled only when IGMP works in the gateway mode. Only when IGMP proxy is enabled in the gateway mode, parameters such as Robustness, General query interval, General query response timeout period, GroupSpecific query times, Group-Specific query interval, and Group-Specific query response timeout period. 3.11.10 Intelligent Channel Configuration NOTE After over-the-top (OTT) service flows are configured and services become normal, you can configure the intelligent channel according to the following description to ensure the OTT service bandwidth and thereby improve service experience. 1. Click the Network Application tab, and choose Intelligent Channel Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, select Intelligent Channel Enabled, and click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, configure the intelligent channel, as shown in Figure 3-69. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 137 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-69 Intelligent channel configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 3-26 3 -26 describes the intelligent channel parameters. Table 3-26 3 -26 Intelligent channel parameters Parameter Description Intelligent Channel Enabled Enables or disables the intelligent channel function. Inbound Port Indicates the port through which packets come in the ONT. The port must be the same as the LAN port that is bound to the WAN port of the intelligent channel service. VLAN Indicates the VLAN carried by packets when packets reach the inbound port. This parameter is not used for live-network services and thereby does not need to be configured. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 138 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Parameter Description Protocol No. Indicates the Layer 3 protocol type of packets. Indicates the Layer 3 protocol type of packets. The following lists the numbers of common protocols: Domain l TCP: 6 l UDP: 17 l IGMP: 2 l ICMP: 1 Indicates the domain name of the intelligent channel. When both the destination IP address and the domain name are configured, the destination IP address takes precedence over over the domain name (that (that is, the domain name does not take effect.) The wildcard domain names in the following format are supported: *.abc.com, abc.com.*, andin abc.*.com. The format wildcard domain names the following are not supported: *abc.com, abc*.com, and a*c.com. Destination IP Address/Mask Indicates the destination IP address and mask of packets related to the intelligent channel service. The IP address can be an address or an address segment. Generally, only the destination IP address and mask need to be configured. Source IP Address/Mask Indicates the source IP address and mask of packets related to the intelligent channel service. The IP address can be an address or an address segment. Destination Port Range Indicates the destination TCP/IP port of packets. It can be a consecutive port range. range. Source Port Range Indicates the source TCP/IP port of packets. It can be a consecutive port range. DSCP Re-marked Indicates the DSCP value to be remarked. A greater DSCP value indicates a higher 802.1p priority. 802.1p Re-marked Indicates the 802.1p value to be remarked, which is generated through association with the DSCP value. The 802.1p value is calculated based on the most significant 3 bits of the DSCP value. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 139 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.11.11 Terminal Limit Configuration NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose Terminal Limit Configuration from the navigation tree. 2. Select Limit mode, as shown in Figure 3-70. Figure 3-70 Limited number of terminals NOTE If Limit mode is Type limit, click Apply, and then the limited number of terminals connected to an ONT can be configured by device type. Click New to configure parameters, as shown in Figure 3-71. Figure 3-71 Limited number of terminals 3. Click Apply. 3.11.12 ARP Ping NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose ARP Ping from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure ARP Ping parameters, parameters, includin including g WAN Name, Interval, and Repetitions, as shown in Figure 3-72 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 140 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-72 ARP Ping Configuration 2. Click Apply. 3.11.13 DNS Configuration 1. Click the Network Application tab and then choose DNS Configuration from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure DNS template, DNS parameters, and you can also configure static DNS domain name resolution, as shown in Figure 3-73 Figure 3-73 DNS Configuration 2. Click Apply. 3.11.14 ARP Aging NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the Network Application tab, and choose ARP Aging from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, set the ARP aging time for the WAN port, as shown in Figure 3-74. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 141 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-74 ARP Aging 2. Click Apply. Table 3-27 3 -27 describes the ARP aging configuration parameters. Table 3-27 3 -27 ARP aging configuration parameters Parameter Description WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN port for which the ARP aging time is configured. It can be an IPv4 routing-type WAN port or IPv4 and IPv6 dual-stack routing-type WAN port. PPPoE routing-type routing-type or other bridgingtype WAN ports are not supported. Protocol Indicates the protocol type of a WAN interface. It can be set to IPv4 or IPv6. ARP Aging Time Indicates the ARP aging time. To reduce the number of ARP requests on the network side, you can set it to a longer period. The actual aging time is 0.5 –1.5 times of the configured aging time. If the configured value is 30s, the actual aging time is a random value within the range of 15 –45s. Set the aging time according to the actual network conditions. Value range: 5–1440s. Default value: 30s 3.11.15 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping Click the Network Application tab, and choose DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping from the navigation tree on the left.On the right pane, set can set the mapping rule and Pbit of the Default Mapping, as shown inFigure 3-75. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-75 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping A mapping rule indicates a newly added DSCP mapping profile. In the example, profile 1 is set and DSCP value is 7, the mapped Pbit is 0; DSCP values 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, and 19, the mapped Pbit is 1. Different priorities are separated by semicolon (;). Field Pbit of the Default Mapping indicates the priority to which a DSCP value maps. In this field, values 0-7 are permitted. If no DSCP value is specified in Mapping Mapping Rule, the value set in Pbit of the Default Mapping takes effect. 3.12 Voice This topic describes how to configure the voice service through the web page. NOTE The web page for configuring the voice service varies with the voice protocols. The following topics describe the web pages after the H.248 protocol and the SIP protocol are loaded. LS1015, LS2025, HS3025 and LS2035Vdo not support this web page. 3.12.1 VoIP Basic Configuration l VoIP Basic Configuration - SIP Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Basic Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters parameters of a VoIP VoIP interface can be configured, configured, including the IP addresses of the primary server and secondary server, server, and digitmap. i. Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss fo forr a voice voice int interf erfac ace. e. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-76 Interface basic parameters–SIP parameters–SIP protocol ii. 143 Config Configure ure basi basicc param paramete eters rs for for a SI SIP P voice voice u user ser.. Figure 3-77 User basic parameters–SIP protocol b. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 3-28 3 -28 describes the parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. Table 3-28 3 -28 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Outbound Proxy Server Address Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP outbound server. This server IP address overrides the primary server IP address. Specifically Specifically,, when IP addresses addresses of both the primary outbound server server and the primary primary server are configured, the primary server IP address does not take effect. Outbound Proxy Server Port Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Standby Outbound Proxy Server If the outbound proxy server fails to start, start the standby outbound proxy server server.. Port of the Standby Outbound Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP proxy server. Port of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary SIP proxy server. Port of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Home Domain Indicates the domain of the registration server of the VoIP terminal in network communications, such as softx3000.huawei.com. Local Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Digitmap Indicates the voice digitmap. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Digitmap Matching Mode Indicates the digitmap matching mode, including Min and Max. l Min: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system immediately reports the number to the call proxy. l Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the call proxy but starts the short timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the system reports the number to the call proxy after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the call proxy. Regi Regist stra rati tion on Peri Period od Indi Indica cate tess tthe he vali valid d re regi gist stra rati tion on peri period od.. When When th this is peri period od expires, the SIP user needs to register again. The value range is 1s to 65534s, and the default value is 600s. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Media Port Indicates the media streams WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Enable User Enables or disables a SIP user. The SIP user starts the registration only after being enabled. URI Indicates the SIP user identifier. It uniquely identifies a SIP user and the value must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Regist Reg istrat ration ion User User Name Name Indica Indicates tes the name name used used for for S SIP IP user user regist registrat ration ion.. It is is generally the user phone number. Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port Indi Indica cate tess th thee POT POTS S port port aass ssoc ocia iate ted d with with the the SIP SIP use userr. NOTE When the device provides only one POTS port, Associated POTS Port is hidden. Authentication User Name Indicates the user name used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Password Indicates the password used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. l VoIP Interface Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Interface Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters of a VoIP interface can be configured, including Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) the address of the primary MGC, device name, and region, as shown in Figure 3-78 and Figure 3-79. i. Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss fo forr a voice voice int interf erfac ace. e. Figure 3-78 Interface basic parameters - H.248 protocol ii. Confi Configure gure basic parameter parameterss for for an an H H.248– .248–based based voice user. user. Figure 3-79 User basic parameters - H.248 protocol b. Click Apply. Table 3-29 3 -29 describes parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. Table 3-29 3 -29 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Address of the Primary MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary MGC server. Port of of the Primar Primary y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the primary MGC server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Address of the Standby MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary MGC server. Port of of the Standb Standby y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the secondary MGC server and the t he VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. MG Domain Fill the domain name when MID Format is set to Domain Name, such as user.huawei.com. user.huawei.com. MG Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Device Name Fill the device name when MID Format is set to Device Name. MID Format Indicates the MG registration format. It can be the MG domain name, IP address, or device name. The MG register format must be the same as the register format provided by the ISP. ISP. Digitmap Matching Mode Indicates the digitmap matching mode, including Min and Max. l Min: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system immediately reports the number to the softswitches. l Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the softswitches but starts the short timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the t he system reports the number to the softswitches after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the softswitches. Enable Digitmap Automatch Enables or disables the function of digitmap auto match. RTP TID Prefix Indicates tth he index of of the ephemeral tteerminatio ion n. Th The de default prefix on Huawei softswitches softswitches is A100. Startt Number Star Number in RTP RTP TID Indicates Indicates tthe he star startt numbe numberr of RTP RTP TID. TID. The default default start start number is 0. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Width of Number in RTP TID Indicates the width of RTP TID. The default number is 6. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the MGC server. Media Port Indicates the WAN port of the voice media streams. When the name of the media port is empty, empty, it indicates that the name of the media port is the same as that of the signaling port. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Enab Enable le Physi hysiccal T TIID Enab Enable less or or dis disaabl blees an an ON ONT PO POTS port port.. Physical TID Indicates the POTS port identifier. Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port Indi Indica cate tess th thee bind bindin ing g of a POT POTS S port port aand nd a phy physi sica call term termin inal al.. 3.12.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration l VoIP Advanced Configuration - SIP protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure parameters of a VoIP user, including the register user name, authentication user name, password, and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 3-80 and Figure 3-81. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 149 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-80 VoIP advanced configuration - interface advanced parameters (SIP protocol) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-81 VoIP advanced configuration - physical interface parameters (SIP protocol) b. Click Apply. Table 3-30 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. protocol. Table 3-30 3 -30 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Advanced Interface Parameters(SIP) Enable Echo Enables or disables echo cancellation. By default, echo cancellation is Cancellation Enable Subscribe enabled. Enables or disables subscription of user rights. When the server type is NGN SIP, SIP, this function is disabled. Fax Transmode Indicates the fax mode, including pass-through and T.38. T.38. Fax Switch Mode l Pass-through: The MG encodes the fax signals transmitted by a fax machine according to the voice codec (G.711), and then coverts such signals into the RTP data packets for real-time transmission over an IP network. l T.38: The MG, through ITU-T T.38, converts the T.30-compliant fax signals transmitted by a fax machine into the T.38 packets for transmission over an IP bearer network. Indicates the fax switching mode, including negotiation and self-switch. The fax switching mode is selected according to the customer requirements. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Profile Parameters Indicates the control point parameters. Such parameters are selected according to the softswitch. Generally, the default settings are adopted. Software Indicates the software parameters. Such parameters are selected according Parameters to the softswitch. Generally, Generally, the default settings are adopted. Digitmap Short Timer Indicates the short timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digitmap Long Timer Indicates the long timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. Shared User Mode Specifies whether to bind telephone numbers to phone ports. Multihomin g Mode 151 l Disabled: The shared user mode is disabled. l Parallel ringing: If this option is selected, only one telephone number can be configured. That is, all phone ports on the ONT share a telephone number.. All telephones ring together when an incoming call iiss made. If number two telephone numbers are configured, this option is invalid. The multi-homing mode supports multiple IP addresses for one end point. That is, one end point can use multiple physical network ports. This improves the end point reliability. If this mode is enabled, two servers (active/standby) must be configured. l Disabled: The multi-homing mode is disabled. l Dual homing (not automatic switchback): Once an ONT is registered with a softswitch (no matter active or standby), the softswitch is always used if it works correctly. correctly. l Dual homing (automatic switchback): The ONT switches back to the active softswitch when detecting that the active softswitch recovers and is reachable. l Loading sharing: The ONT is registered with one of the addresses resolved from the domain name to ensure that multiple softswitches process services in load load sharing mode. DTMF Transmissio n Mode Specifies the DTMF signal transmission mode. DTMF signals can be transmitted transparently or in RFC2833 packets. RFC2833 Payload Type Specifies the payload value used for transmit DTMF signals in RFC2833 packets. It ranges ranges from 96 to 127. Voice Server Type Indicates the supported voice server type. l IMS SIP Server: core network service type based on the SIP protocol. l Softswitch: softswitch NGN service type based on the SIP protocol. l H.248 Server: H.248 service type. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Offhook DT-AS ACK Interval Indicates the time during which the DT-A DT-AS S signal (detects whether a phone supports offhook CLIP) waits for a response from the phone. Option 120 Priority Configures the valid priority of option 120. l Ignore: Does not use the option 120 mode. l Highest: Indicates that the option 120 mode for IP address acquisition is higher than other modes. For example, the web page is used for proxy server address configuration. l Lowest: Indicates that the option 120 mode for IP address acquisition is lower than other modes. For example, the web page is used for proxy server address configuration. Advanced User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Code Codecc In Indi dica cate tess eenc ncod odin ing/ g/de deco codi ding ng.. In In en enco codi ding ng,, tthe he DSP DSP enc encod odes es TDM TDM voic voicee data into packets and sends the packets to the IP network. In decoding, the DSP decodes the voice packets received from the network and sends the data to the TDM side. Four types of codec are supported: G.711MuLaw, G.711MuLaw, G. 711ALaw,, G.729, and G.722; and supports silence compression. 711ALaw Packet Pack et Ti Time me Indicates Indicates the interv interval al at which which the DSP assemb assembles les voice voice packets. packets. Differe Different nt encoding modes support different packetization periods. The period can be 10 ms, 20 ms, or 30 ms, and the default period is 20 ms. Pr Prio iori rity ty Indi Indica cate tess the the cod codec ec prio priori rity ty.. T Two wo us user erss nego negoti tiat atee the the prio priori rity ty in des desce cend ndin ing g order.. Currently, priorities 1-4 are supported, with 1 being the highest order priority.. priority En Enab able led d Indi Indica cate tess whe wheth ther er the the use userr ccar arri ries es th thee cod codec ec (ena (enabl ble: e: ca carr rry; y; dis disab able le:: not not carry). DSP TX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the local POTS side to the remote IP side. DSP RX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the remote IP side to the local POTS side. Enable Hotline Enables or disables the hotline function. Hotline Number Indicates the hotline number. After the user specifies a number as the hotline number and also enables the hotline function, the number is automatically dialed if the user does not dial the number following a delay time expiration after offhook. Hotline Delay Indicates the period over which the user does not dial the number after offhook. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Enable Call Forwarding Uncondition al Enables the call forwarding unconditional (CFU) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can unconditionally forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox. Call Forwarding Uncondition al Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding Busy Enables the call forwarding busy (CFB) function. A called party-side service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox when the user is busy on another call. Call Forwarding Busy Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding on No Reply Enables the call forwarding on no reply (CFNR) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox if the calls are not answered within a preset period. Call Forwarding on No Reply Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Call Waiting Waiting A calle called d party-side party-side service service,, with which, which, if user C calls calls user A when when user user A is talking with user B, user A hears a call waiting (CW) tone indicating that there is an incoming call. Message Waiting Indicator This indicator on the phone is on when receiving a new message for a user who is provisioned with the voice mailbox service. Three-party Call When user A is communicating with user B and user C wants to jjoin oin the call, user A can call user C without disconnecting the call with user B. In this case, these 3 users can communicate with each other or two of three can communicate with each other. Call Holding A user in a call can hold this call. Malicious Call Identificatio n A called party-side service, with which, a user can identify the calling number if the user receives a malicious call. Caller ID A called party-side service allows the number of the calling party to be Display Issue 01 (2019-09-20) presented to the called called party. party. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Anonymous Call This service does not allow the number of the t he calling party who registers this service to be presented to the called party. party. Call Enables or disables the call transfer function. Transfer Physical Port Parameters (SIP) Ringing Voltage Indicates the voltage when a phone rings. DC Volt Voltage age Indica Indicates tes the DC volt voltage age on a voice voice port port.. Range Range:: 0–25. It is required if a traditional phone connected cannot ring. The specific value needs to be checked. For example, set it to 10 and check whether the issue is resolved. If the issue is not resolved, set it to 11. Attempt to set the value till the issue is resolved. Port TX gain Indicates the Tx gain on a port. Port gain RX Indicates the Rx gain on a port. Lower Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the lower threshold for flash hooking (press the flash button). This function is used for call transfer from an external call to an internal call. Upper Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the upper threshold for flash hooking. On-hook Indicates the onhook confirmation time. Confirmatio n Time Impeda Imp edance nce Indica Indicates tes the impeda impedance nce of the connec connected ted device device.. Feed Current Feed current supplies power to speech circuits, which requires only current but no voltage. CLIP Format Specifies the CLIP format that is supported by the connected phone, including Mdmf-FSK , Sdmf-FSK , Dtmf, R1.5, and Etsi. FSK Transmissio n Delay Indicates the delay before FSK signals are issued. CLIP Flow l After ring: the number of the calling party is presented after ringing. l Before ring: the number of the calling party is presented before ringing. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description Enable DSP Template This function can only be used for maintenance and cannot be enabled. Global DSP It can be set to highspeed_m highspeed_modem, odem, lowspeed_modem, lowspeed_modem, staticjbmode, Template Name alarmdevice. Polarity Reversal on POTS Port Enables or disables polarity reversal on a POTS port. This function is usually used for charging. Display Time in CLIP Enables or disables time synchronization on a phone. After this function is enabled, the ONT issues time to the phone. Enable DSP HighPass Filter Enables this function to mask the low frequency (lower than 50 Hz) interference on the phone. Enable Enables or disables forced FSK transmission. Forced FSK Transmissio n NOTE Physical Port Parameters are physical parameters (defined in the standard) of a POTS port. For details, see the standard. l VoIP Advanced Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure the line name and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 3-82. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 156 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-82 VoIP advanced configuration - H.248 protocol b. Click Apply. Table 3-31 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. protocol. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Table 3-31 3 -31 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Configure Global Parameters(H Parameters(H.248) .248) Enable Enab le Echo Cancellatio Cancellation n Echo is mainly produced produced from from PSTN PSTN users. users. Remote Remote users users can feel the echo generated on the user port and the call quality is affected. Fax Transmode The fax can be divided into fax pass through (G.711), T.38 fax (T.38 encoding). Fax Swi witc tch h Mo Mod de Wheth hetheer to parti artici cipa pate te in th thee SIP si sign gnaali ling ng,, fax fax ty type pe can be divided into consultations fax, since switching the fax. Profile Index The system has built-in universal profile index, if does not meet the demand, according to the actual specific configuration Profile index. Profile Parameters If the profile index is User-defined , configure the profile parameter according according to actual configurations. configurations. Soft Parameter Select the default software parameters. Start Sta rt Nego Negotia tiate te V Vers ersion ion H.248 H.248 vers version ion of tthe he nego negotia tiatio tions ns base based d on the profil profilee parameter.. parameter Digi Digitm tmap ap St Star artt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess the the sta start rt ti time merr of of the the di digi gitm tmap ap.. T Thi hiss time timerr ssta tart rtss up when a user picks up the phone and hears the dialing tone. If the user does not dial digits within the time specified by the timer, the call is released. Digi Digitm tmap ap Sho Short rt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee shor shortt ti time merr of the the d dig igit itma map. p. T Thi hiss time timerr star starts ts up up if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digi Digitm tmap ap Lon Long g Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee long long tim timer er of the the d dig igitm itmap ap.. This This tim timer er st star arts ts up up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. Enab Enable le Hear eartbea tbeatt Enab Enable less o orr disa disabl blees h heeartb artbeeat at.. A he heartbe rtbeaat me mess ssag agee iiss tth he one one exchanged between 2 devices and it does not require a response message. This message is used to report its normal running. Heartbeat Message Interval Indicates the interval at which heartbeat messages are sent. Heartbeat Message Retransmission Interval Indicates the interval at which heartbeat messages are retransmitted. Heartbeat Message Retransmission Count Indicates the retransmission count of heartbeat messages. User Advanced Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Parameter Description DSP TX Ga Gain Indicates tth he direction iin n wh which ga gain ttaakes eefffect: ffrrom the remote IP side to the local POTS side. DSP RX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the local POTS side to the remote IP side. Physical Port Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Ringing Voltage Indicates th the voltage when a ph phone rings. DC Voltage Indicates the DC voltage on a voice port. Range: 0–25. It is required if a traditional phone connected cannot ring. The specific value needs to be checked. For example, set it to 10 and check whether the issue is resolved. If the issue is not resolved, set it to 11. Attempt to set the value till the issue is resolved. Port TX gain Indicates the Tx gain on a port. Port RX gain Indicates the Rx gain on a port. Lower Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the lower threshold for flash hooking (press the flash button). This function is used for for call transfer from from an external call to an internal call. Upper Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the upper threshold for flash hooking. On-hook Confirmation Time Indicates the onhook confirmation time. Impedance Indicates the impedance of a port. Feed Current Feed current supplies power to speech circuits, which requires only current but no voltage. CLIP Format Specifies the CLIP format. FSK Tr Transmi ansmission ssion Delay Delay Indic Indicates ates the delay before before FS FSK K si signals gnals are issued. issued. CLIP Flow Indicates the CLIP flow before and after ringing. En Enab able le DSP DSP Tem Templ plat atee This This ffun unct ctio ion n ca can n only only be be used used for for m mai aint nten enan ance ce an and d cann cannot ot be be enabled. Global DSP Template Name It can be set to highspeed_m highspeed_modem, odem, lowspeed_modem, lowspeed_modem, staticjbmode,, alarmdevice. staticjbmode Disp Displa lay y Tim Timee iin n CLI CLIP P Enab Enable less o orr d dis isab able less ttim imee syn synch chro roni niza zati tion on on a p pho hone ne.. Enable DSP HighPass Filter Enables this function to mask the low frequency (lower than 50 Hz) interference on the phone. Enable Forced FSK Enables or disables forced FSK transmission. Transmission Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 159 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) NOTE Physical Port Parameters are physical parameters (defined in the standard) of a POTS port. For details, see the standard. 3.12.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion Click the Voice tab, and choose SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion from the navigation tree on the left. 1. In the right pane, pane, you can can change change the VoIP VoIP protoc protocol ol (SIP (SIP or H.248) H.248) by changin changing g the value of the Voice parameter, as shown in Figure 3-83. Figure 3-83 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion NOTE Exercise caution when performing this operation because it will interrupt the ongoing call and delete current data. 2. Click Apply. 3.13 System Tools This topic describes how to use the system tools on the web page, including using the tools to restart the device, and restore the default configuration. 3.13.1 Reboot In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Reboot. In the pane on the right, click Reboot to restart the device, as shown in i n Figure 3-84. Figure 3-84 Reboot Save the configuration data before restarting the device. For details, see 3.13.2 Configuration File. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 160 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.13.2 Configuration File In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Configuration File. In the pane on the right, click the button as required as shown in Figure 3-85. Figure 3-85 Configuration File l l l l Click Save to save the configuration file to the flash memory. This prevents data loss due to the restart of the device. Click Save and Restart to save the configuration file and reboot the ONT. Click Download Configuration File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the configuration file, and then back up the file to the local disk. Click Browse following the Configuration File text box. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the configuration file to be uploaded. Click Update Configuration File to upload the configuration file that is saved in the local disk. After the configuration file is successfully uploaded, the device automatically restarts and then the new configuration takes effect. Before uploading the configuration file, choose the configuration file with the correct type and the name of the selected configuration file must not be the same as that of any file saved in the device. Otherwise, the configuration file fails to be uploaded. When IE8 is used for configuration file downloading and you click the t he save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded configuration file is incomplete. 3.13.3 Firmware Upgrade NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Firmware Upgrade. In the pane on the right, click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the target Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 161 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) software version of the device. Click Update Firmware to upgrade the software of the device, as shown in Figure 3-86. Figure 3-86 Firmware Upgrade 2. After the up upgrad gradee is su succes ccessful, sful, a message message is is displayed displayed indicating indicating that that the device device needs needs to be reset. Click Restart. The configuration data takes effect after the device is reset. 3.13.4 Restore Default Configuration In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Restore Default Configuration. In the pane on the right, click Default to restore the factory defaults, as shown in Figure 3-87. Figure 3-87 Restore Default Configuration Exercise caution when you perform this operation because it restores factory defaults. 3.13.5 Maintenance In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Maintenance. 1. In the the pan panee on on the the righ right, t, clic click k Start Hardware Fault Detection to start hardware fault detection, as shown in Figure 3-88. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 162 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-88 Maintenance 3.13.6 VoIP Statistics NOTE LS1015, LS2025 andHS3025and LS1035Vdo not support this web page. Click the System Tools tab, and choose VoIP Statistics from the navigation tree on the left. Figure 3-89 VoIP Statistics 3.13.7 VoIP Diagnose NOTE LS1015, LS2025 andHS3025and LS1035Vdo not support this web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 163 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Click the System Tools tab, and choose VoIP Diagnose from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, set POTS Index and click Start Test to start a voice loop line or circuit line test. Figure 3-90 shows the parameter settings for a loop line test. Figure 3-90 Loop test NOTE If you want to perform a loop line test during a call, select Forced Test On Busy. Figure 3-91 shows the parameter settings for a circuit line test. Figure 3-91 Circuit test 3.13.8 Remote Mirror 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Remote Mirror, as shown in Figure 3 92. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 164 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-92 Remote mirror Packets sent to and transmitted from the CPU can be remotely captured for analysis based on the configuration. configuration. 2. – Source IP Address: indicates the IP address of the WAN port where remote mirroring is performed. – Destination IP Address: indicates the IP address of the host where the result is located. – Type Type of the captured packets: indicates the type of the captured packets that are broadband, wifi and voice voice . Click Start. NOTE Some third-party plug-ins, such as Google Chrome Frame, may lead to downloading failure. If such a failure occurs, disable the plug-in. Based on your requirements, this function may involve using, obtaining, or saving some information about users' communications for the purpose of safeguarding network operation and protecting services. Huawei alone is unable to collect or save the content of users' communications. It is suggested that you activate the interception-related functions based on the applicable laws and regulations in terms of purpose and and scope o off usage. Y You ou are oblig obligated ated to take considerab considerable le measures measures to ensure th that at the content content of users' communications is fully protected when the content is being used and saved. 3.13.9 User Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > User Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 3-93. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 165 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-93 Log l l l Select Save Log to enable the log saving function in the system. You cannot configure Log Level, which indicates the level of the saved log. The log whose level is equal to or higher than the debug-level log is saved. Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 3.13.10 Debug Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Debug Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 3-94. Figure 3-94 Log Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) l 166 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 3.13.11 Firewall Log Click the System Tools tab, and choose Firewall Log from the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, you can view logs and download log files, as shown in Figure 3-95. Figure 3-95 Firewall Log When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 10s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 3.13.12 ONT Authentication 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > ONT Authentication Authentication. In the pane on the right, you can can view or change the authentication mode for for the registration of the ONT on the OLT, as shown in Figure 3-96 and Figure 3-97. Figure 3-96 ONT authentication (administrator) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) NOTE There are 2 modes for ONT authentication: LOID and Password. l When Authentication Mode is LOID, you can query and change the LOID and Password of an ONT. l When Authentication Mode is Password, you can query and change the Password Mode, Password, and SN of an ONT. An administrator can change the password of an online ONT. If this ONT authentication mode is password and you change its password, this ONT goes offline. Figure 3-97 ONT authentication (common user) NOTE A common user cannot change the password of an online ONT. 2. Click Apply. 3.13.13 Time Setting NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Time Setting. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the system time, including the SNTP server, time zone, and daylight saving time (DST), as shown in Figure 3-98. Figure 3-98 Time Setting 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 168 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Table 3-32 3 -32 describes the parameters related to the system time. Table 3-32 3 -32 Parameters related to the system time Parameter Description Auto Synchronization Network Time Time Server Indicates whether to enable the auto synchronization network time server, that is, SNTP server. Pr Prim imar ary y SNT SNTP P Ser Serve verr Indi Indica cate tess tthe he prim primar ary y SNT SNTP P ser serve verr. Secondar Seco ndary y SNTP SNTP Serve Serverr Indicates Indicates the secondary secondary SNTP server server.. Time Zone Indicates the time zone. Time Synchronization Period Indicates whether to enable the DST. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN port to which the option to be configured belongs. A maximum of eight options can be configured for each WAN WAN port. DST Start Time Indicates the DST start time. DST End Time Indicates the DST end time. NOTE If the SNTP server is configured based on domain name f ormat, a sta static tic route or a default route must be configured. If the static route or default route is not configured, the ONT will fail to obtain time from the SNTP server. For detailed procedures, see 3.9 Route. If the SNTP server is configured based on IP address format, you can skip the operation above. 3.13.14 TR-069 NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > TR-069. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 server, as shown in Figure 3-99. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 3-99 TR-069 NOTE Configuring the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 requires creating a WAN interface. In addition, Service List of the WAN interface must contain the TR069. For details, see 3.3.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. Table 3-33 3 -33 describes the TR-069 parameters. Table 3-33 3 -33 TR-069 parameters Parameter Description ACS Parameter Settings Enable ACS Management Indicates whether to enable the ACS Management. Enable Periodic Informing Indicates whether to enable the notification function. l If the notification function is enabled, the ONT actively sends a connection request to the TR-069 server. l If the notification function is disabled, the ONT does not actively send a connection request to the TR-069 server. server. When the notification function is enabled, the Period Inform Interval and Period Inform Time parameters can be set. In Info form rmin ing g IInt nter erva vall Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In Indi dica cate tess tthe he inte interv rval al for for the the ONT ONT to to ssen end d a con conne nect ctio ion n rreq eque uest st to the TR-069 server. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 170 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Parameter Description In Info forrmi ming ng Time ime Indic ndicat atees the the ti time me for for th thee ONT ONT to se sen nd a conn conneect ctio ion n requ requeest to the TR-069 server. ACS URL Indicates the address of the TR-069 server to which the ONT sends a connection request. ACS User ser Na Name Indic ndicat atees tthe he us useer n nam amee for th thee ONT ONT tto o rreegi gist ster er wi with th th thee TRTR-0 069 server. ACS Password Indicates the password for the ONT to register with the TR-069 server. Connection Request User Name Indicates the user name to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. Connection Request Password Indicates the password to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. DSCP Defined by RFC2474 "Definition of the Differentiated Services Field". Differentiated Services Services Code Point (DSCP) uses code values for priority marking. DSCP can be customized for ISPs based on service requirements requirements so that devices devices on a network perform QoS based based on the DSCP value. value. Enable Certificate Authentication Authentication and Set Private Key Password Enable Certificate Authentication Enable the certificate if the ACS is connected through SSL. Privat Pri vatee Ke Key y Passw Password ord Sets Sets the the priva private te k key ey pass passwor word d after after the certif certifica icate te is is enabl enabled. ed. Conf Confir irm m Pas Passw swor ord d Conf Confir irms ms the the pass passwo word rd an and d eens nsur ures es th that at it is th thee sa same me as Private Key Password. Import Certificate Certificate Indicates the certificate file provided by the ISP. 3.13.15 Advanced Power Management 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose System Tools > Advanced Power Management . In the pane on the right, you can start the ONT energy saving, as shown in Figure 3-100. Figure 3-100 Advanced Power Management Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 171 Click Apply. 3.13.16 Modify Login Password 1. Click the System Tools tab and then choose Modify Login Password from the navigation tree. . In the right pane, change the password of the root user, as shown in Figure 3-101 Figure 3-101 Modify Login Password NOTE l l 2. After the user logs in to the ONT Web interface using the default common user name and password, the Modify Login Password interface is automatically displayed, prompting the password, user to change the initial password. After the user successfully changes the password, the Modify Login Password interface is no longer displayed in the following logins. Change the initial user name and password after logging in to the web page. Click Apply. 3.13.17 Intelligent Channel Statistics NOTE HS3025 does not support this web page. 1. Click the System Tools tab and choose Intelligent Channel Statistics from the navigation tree. In the right pane, select Enable Count to enable traffic statistics collection for intelligent channels, as shown in Figure 3-102. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 172 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-102 Intelligent Channel Statistics NOTE You can enable traffic statistics collection only when intelligent channels are configured and Intelligent Channel Enabled is selected on Network Application > Intelligent Channel Configuration. 3.13.18 Fault Info Collect Click the System Tools tab, and choose Fault Info Collect from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click Start to collect ONT fault information, as shown in Figure 3-103. Figure 3-103 Fault information collection NOTE After the information is collected, click Download to download the collected information to a local directory. When IE8 is used for fault info collect and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the fault info collect is incomplet incomplete. e. 3.13.19 Indicator Status Management 1. Click System Tools. On the navigation tree, choose Indicator Status Managemen Managementt. In the right pane, you can set the indicator switch and disabling time segment, as shown in Figure 3-104. Figure 3-104 Indicator status management Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 173 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) NOTE If both Global indicator disabling time segment and Customized indicator disabling time segment are configured, Customized indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is selected for Customized indicator disabling time segment, and Global indicator disabling time segment takes effect if Whether to Validate Customized Time Segments is not selected. 2. Click Apply. 3.13.20 One-Click Diagnosis On the System Tools tab page, choose One-Click Diagnosis from the left navigation tree. On the right pane, click One-Click Diagnosis to start one-click diagnosis on ONT password security,, Internet connection status, ONT hardware status, and voice service status, as shown security in Figure 3-105. Figure 3-105 One-click diagnosis Figure 3-106. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 174 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) Figure 3-106 One-click diagnosis 3.13.21 Open Source Software Notice In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Tools > Open Source Software Notice. In the pane on the right, you can view the open source software notice for the product, as shown in Figure 3-107. Figure 3-107 Open source software notice Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 3 Web Page Reference (HG8245H, HG8247H, HG8245Q, HG8045H, HG8245U, HG8245Q2, EG8245H, EG8247H, HG8121H, HG8045, EG8120L, EG8247W) 3.14 Bundle NOTE EG8247W do not support this web page. This topic describes the bundle information on the web page. 3.14.1 Bundle Information On the Bundle tab page, choose Bundle Information from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, you can query ID, name, and version, as shown in Figure 3-108. Figure 3-108 Bundle information 175 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 176 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) This topic describes the usage and meanings of the parameters on the web page. Before configuring and viewing the parameters on the web page, log in to the web page. For details about how to log in to the web page, see 4.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface. The web page of the HN8055Q/HN8245Q varies according to ONT capability sets. For bridging-type ONTs, ONTs, GUIs for Layer 3 and voice configurations configurations are not supported. For ONTs ONTs without Wi-Fi interfaces, GUIs for wireless network configurations are not supported. For details on ONT capability sets, refer to 7.1 Reference of GPON ONT Capability Sets. This topic uses figures of the HN8245Q accessed by the administrator (telecomadmin) as examples. Different ONTs may have different screencaptures, actual screencaptures prevail. Because different voice protocols, the Voice node contains different parameters. parameters. Only one of the SIP and H.248 protocols can be supported at a time. Which protocol is supported depends on the ONT used. The configuration window for an administrator is different from that for a common user. l Compared with a common user, an administrator has permissions to view and configure all parameters on the web page. A common user use r can configure and query some nodes and parameters and the queried information is less than that queried by an administrator. administrator. This topic lists different nodes queried by a common user. For details, see the web page for a common user. l A common common user d does oes not have permissions to view the following parameters: – Layer 2/3 Port Configuration and DHCPv6 Information Information under the LAN Configuration node – Dos Configuration under the Security Configuration node – Route node – Time Setting, IGMP Configuration and Intelligent ChannelConf ChannelConfiguration iguration under the Application node – TR-069 under the System Management node – The Voice node – Software Upgrade, Debug log, Remote Mirror, Fault Info Collect andVoIP Statistics under the Maintenance Diagnosenode Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface This topic describes the data plan and procedure for logging in to the web configuration interface. Context Before setting up the configuration environment, ensure that data information listed in Table 4-1 is available. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 178 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-1 4 -1 Data plan Item Description Us User er name name and and pass passwo word rd Defa Defaul ultt sett settin ings gs:: l Administrator (installation and maintenance personnel): – User name: telecomadmin – Password: admintelecom NOTE l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login login interfac interface. e. Then, Y You ou can unlock unlock the acc account ount by entering the login user name and password. l Three times within five minutes the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the BMS. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr corresponding esponding ISP. ISP. CAUTION l l Please change the initial password to ensure administrator account security. l Do not provide terminal users with the password of the administrator account. The administrator account is used by the ISP for O&M. If a terminal user uses the administrator account, service parameters may be incorrectly modified and services may be affected. affected. Common user (terminal user): – User name: root – Password: adminHW NOTE l The common user account can be used to query the service status. For ONTs that support Wi-Fi and the USB storage function, the common user account can be used to configure services such as Wi-Fi and home sharing. l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login login interfac interface. e. Then, Y You ou can unlock unlock the acc account ount by entering the login user name and password. l Three times the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the Web. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding.. For details, con preceding contact tact the corr correspondin esponding g ISP ISP.. CAUTION Change the initial password after Common users log in to the web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Item Description LAN IP address and subnet mask Default settings: IP address and subnet mask of the PC 179 l IP address: 192.168.100.1 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as the LAN IP address of the ONT. For example: l IP address: 192.168.100.100 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Procedure Step 1 Use a network cable to connect the LAN port of the ONT to a PC. Step 2 Ensure that the Internet Explorer (IE) of the PC does not use the proxy server. The following section considers IE 6.0 as an example to describe how to check whether the IE uses the proxy server. server. 1. Start th the IE IE, and choose ToolsInternet Options from the main menu of the IE window. Then, the Internet Options interface is displayed. 2. In the Internet Options interface, click the Connections tab, and then click LAN settings. 3. In the Proxy server area, ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). check box is not selected (that is, without the "√" sign). If the check box is selected, deselect it, and then click OK. Step 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask of the t he PC. For details, see Table 4-1. Step 4 Log in to the Web Web configuration interface. 1. Enter http://192.168.100.1 in the address bar of IE (192.168.100.1 is the default IP address of the ONT), and then press Enter to display the login interface, as shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1 Login interface Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 180 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) NOTE The web page login supports SSL3.0, TLS1.0, TLS1.1, and TLS1.2. It is recommended that you use high-security TLS1.1 or TLS1.2 if you log in to the ONT using https. The TCP port 80 is used for listening for HTTPS packets. You need to type "https://192.168.100.1:80" in the address bar of IE and press Enter to log in to the ONT. 2. In the login interface interface,, ente enterr the use name name and and password password.. For detail detailss about about default default settings settings of the user name and password, see Table 4-1. After the password authentication is passed, the Web Web configuration interface interface is displayed. ----End 4.2 Fast Setting This topic describes how to quickly set an ONT. ONT. Administrator NOTE l Only the ONT web page supports ONT WAN configurations. l For methods of setting ONT Authentication and WAN Configuration, see 4.6.9.4 ONT Authentication and 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration. Common User NOTE l When the root user logs in to the ONT web page for the first time, this page is displayed. In other cases, you need to click Fast Setting on the upper right corner of the Home Page to go to this page. l For detailed account management operations, see 4.6.9.2 Account Management. 4.3 Home Page This topic describes the ONT common configurations, such as Wi-Fi Wi-Fi configuration, home sharing, and network status query. Auxiliary buttons on the upper right corner of the page can guide you to different pages. 4.4 One-click Diagnosis Diagnosis This topic describes how to quickly diagnose ONT network faults. 1. Choose One-click Diagnose from the navigation tree on the left panel. Then click Oneclick Diagnose on the right panel to t o diagnose the network status, as shown in Figure 4-2. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 181 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-2 One-click diagnosis 2. Figure 4-3 shows the diagnosis results. Figure 4-3 Diagnosis result NOTE This diagnosis method applies for only a professional engineer and it affects data services. Therefore, exercise caution when you use this diagnosis method. Querying the voice service status is not supported by the HN8055Q. If you need to re-diagnose re-diagnose the faults, click Diagnose again. 4.5 SystemThis Info topic describes how to query the information about the t he ONT, ONT, including ETH port information, optical information, and user device information through the Web page. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 182 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.5.1 Device Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > Device Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the product name, hardware version, and software version, as shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 Device Information 4.5.2 WAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > WAN Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the status of the WAN WAN interface, mode of obtaining an IP address, IP address, and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 4-5 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 183 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-5 WAN Information NOTE Click a record in the WAN list, You can view more detailed information by clicking a record in the WAN lis list. t. If Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE and Dialing method is selected as Manual on the WAN Configuration WebPage, you can click Connected link to connect the current WAN port, click disconnected link to disconnect the current WAN port. 4.5.3 Optical Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > Optical Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the optical status, transmit optical power, receive optical power of the optical module, as shown in Figure 4-6. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 184 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-6 Optical Information 4.5.4 Service Provisioning Status Click the System Info tab, and choose Service Provisioning Status from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, the ONT service provisioning status is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7. Figure 4-7 Service Provisioning Status 4.5.5 VoIP Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > VoIP Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the t he information such as user status and call status. The SIP configuration page is slightly different from the H.248 configuration page, as shown in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 185 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-8 VoIP Information - SIP Figure 4-9 VoIP Information - H.248 If the VoIP service needs to be restarted, click Restart VoIP in the pane on the right. 4.5.6 Eth Port Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > Eth Port Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the duplex mode, speed, and status of the ETH port, as shown in Figure 4-10. Figure 4-10 Eth Port Information Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 186 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.5.7 WLAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Info > WLAN Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can can query the information information such as Wi-Fi Wi-Fi port status, Wi-Fi Wi-Fi packet statistics, and SSID, as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-11 WLAN Information NOTE Choose 2.4G Wireless network information or 5G Wireless network information to query 2.4G or 5G WLAN information. 4.5.8 Home Network Information Click the System info tab, and choose Home Network Information from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, check the device status, statistical information, and neighbor AP information of external APs in the WiFi network, as shown in the figure below. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 187 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-12 Smart WiFi Coverage 4.5.9 Cloud Platform Status On the System Info tab page, choose Cloud Platform Status from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, query the running status of the cloud platform, as shown in Figure 4-13. Figure 4-13 Cloud platform status 4.6 Advanced Configuration This topic describes how to configure functions through the Web page, including LAN or WAN Configuration, Security Configuration, and so on. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.1 WAN Configuration This topic describes how to configure the WAN interface through the Web page. 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration l WAN Configuration - route a. 188 In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Advanced Configuration > WAN Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set Mode to Route WAN, as shown in Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15. Figure 4-14 WAN Configuration - route(IPv4) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-15 WAN Configuration - route(IPv6) b. 189 Click Apply. All data associated with the WAN will be deleted after you delete the WAN port configuration. Exercise caution when you perform this operation. Table 4-2 4 -2 describes the parameters related to the W WAN AN in route mode. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 190 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-2 4 -2 Parameters related to the WAN in route mode Parameter Description Enable Enab le WAN WAN Connecti Connection on Indic Indicates ates wheth whether er to enable enable the WAN connec connection. tion. En Enca caps psul ulat atio ion n Mod Modee Indi Indica cate tess tthe heoren enca caps psul ulat atio n mod modee of of a WAN in inte terf rfac ace. e. It ca can n be be set to IPoE PPPoE . ion Protocol Ty Type Indicates tth he protocol tty ype of a WAN iin nterface. It It ccaan be set to to IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4/IPv6 dual stack. Mode Indicates the WAN interface mode. It can be set to Bridge WAN or Route WAN. Service List Indicates the service type of the WAN interface. It can be set to TR069, INTERNET, TR069_INTERNET , VOIP, TR069_VOIP , VOIP_INTERNET , TR069_VOIP_INTERNET , IPTV, OTHER, VOIP_IPTV, TR069_IPTV or TR069_VOIP_IPTV . Enable VLAN Selects this check box to set VLAN ID and 802.1p priority. VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. It ranges from 1 to 4094. The VLAN ID must be the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT. 802.1p policy Indicates the 802.1p priority policy. l Use specified value: indicates that a specified priority value is used. If you select this option, you need to set the 802.1p parameter.. parameter l Copy from IP precedence: indicates that the priority is copied from the ToS field in the t he IP header of the user-side packets. If the received received packet is not an an IP packet or the packet does not carry carry the 802.1p priority, priority, the default 802.1p priority is used. If you select select this option, you need to set the Default 802.1p parameter. MTU Indicates the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IPoE packets. This parameter parameter needs to be set only only when Encapsulation Mode is set to IPoE. MRU Indicates the maximum receive unit (MRU) of PPPoE packets. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. User name Indicates the user name that is used for PPPoE dialup. This user name must be the same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. Password Indicates the password that is used for PPPoE dialup. This password must be the same same as that configured on the BRAS. This parameter needs to be set only when Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 191 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description En Enab able le LCP LCP det detec ecti tion on Th This is para parame mete terr nee needs ds to be se sett onl only y whe when n Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE. l If you select this option, the t he LCP detection function is enabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system will detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link normal if the LCP request is detected. l Binding options If you do not select this option, the LCP detection function is disabled. When the local LCP request times out and no response is received, the system does not detect LCP requests from the peer and considers the link abnormal. Used to bind tth he WAN in interface to tth he LA LAN port o orr to tth he wireless SSID. NOTE Before setting the binding options, set the work mode of the LAN port to route or set the wireless SSID. The binding options can be set only after the work mode or wireless SSID is successfu successfully lly set. For details, see 4.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration, 4.6.7.1 2.4G Basic Network Settings and 4.6.7.3 5G Basic Network Settings. IPv4 Information IP Acqu Acquis isit itio ion nM Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess tthe he mode mode of ob obta tain inin ing g an an IPv IPv4 4 aadd ddre ress ss on th thee ONT ONT.. It It can be set to DHCP, Static, or PPPoE. If the encapsulation mode is set to IPoE, this parameter can be set to DHCP or Static. If the encapsulation mode is set to PPPoE, this parameter can be set to only PPPoE. l In DHCP mode, the IP address is dynamically obtained. l In static mode, the IP address is set statically. You need to enter the IP address, subnet mask, IP addresses of the active and standby DNS servers, and default gateway. gateway. l In PPPoE mode, you need to enter the user name and password. Enable NAT Indicates whether to enable the NAT function. NAT NA T type Specifies the NAT NAT type. It can be set set to Port-restricted cone NAT NA T or Full-cone NAT. This parameter is configurable only if the NAT function is enabled. l Port-restricted cone NAT: After an internal address A is mapped to an external address B, an external host can send packets to A by sending packets packets to B only if A has previously sent a packet packet to the host. The source IP and port number in the message sent by the host must be the same as the destination IP and port number in the previous message sent by A. Full-cone NAT: After an internal address A is mapped to an external address B, any external host can send packets to A by sending packets to B. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 192 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Dial Method Indicates the PPPoE dialup method. It can be set to Auto, Manual, or On Demand. Mult Mu ltic icas astt V VLA LAN N ID ID Indi Indica cate tess tthe he mult multic icas astt VLA VLAN N ID, ID, ra rang ngin ing g ffro rom m 1 to 4094 4094.. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. Vendor ID Sets the option 60 field on the DHCP client. The IP address can be obtained from the DHCP server only when the option 60 field is the same as the setting on the upper-layer DHCP server. When IP Acquisition Mode is set to DHCP, this parameter is configurable. configurable. User ID Adds the Option 61 information to the DHCP packet for a WAN port request. This parameter is used to identify a WAN port uniquely in a customer's customer's network management management domain. This parameter is configurable when IP acquisition mode is set to DHCP. IPv6 Information Prefix Pre fix Acqu Acquisi isitio tion n Mod Modee Indica Indicates tes tthe he pr prefi efix x acq acquis uisitio ition n mode. mode. It can can be set set to DHCPPD, Static, or None. l DHCPv6-PD: When the parameter is set to DHCPv6-PD, the BRAS assigns a prefix to the ONT in DHCPv6 mode. l Static: When the parameter is set to Static, you need to manually enter a prefix. l None: When the parameter parameter is set to None, no prefix is obtained. l If this parameter is set to RA or Auto in an earlier version, its value will be automatically changed to DHCPv6-PD automatically after the version is upgraded to V300R019C00&V500R019C00. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 193 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description IP Acqu Acquis isit itio ion nM Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess the the IP ac acqu quis isit itio ion n mod mode. e. It ca can n be be sset et to DHCPv6, Automatic, Static, or None. l If this parameter is set to Automatic, you need to make the prefix mask 64-bit long. The prefix mask length of the IPv6 address is similar to the subnet mask of the IPv4 address. l If this parameter is set to Static, you need to enter the IP address, primary DNS server, and secondary DNS server. The ONT address mode can be Numbered or Unnumbered. When the address mode is Numbered, the ONT WAN port has its own IPv6 GUA address. When the address mode is Unnumbered, the ONT WAN port has an LLA address but no GUA address, which is not good for network management and fault location. Therefore, the Numbered mode is recommended. l l Mult Mu ltic icas astt V VL LAN ID When the Numbered mode is used, the setting of IP Acquisition Mode is as follows: – When M=1 is set for the RA packet on the BRAS, IP addresses are obtained in DHCPv6 mode on the WAN side. Then, IP acquisition mode can be set to DHCPv6 or Automatic. Automatic is recommended. – When M=0 is set for the RA packet on the BRAS, IP addresses are obtained in ND (stateless address allocation) mode on the WAN side. Then, IP acquisition mode can be set to Automatic. When the Unnumbered mode is used, IP acquisition mode is set to None. The The mu multic lticaast VLAN VLAN ID range angess fr from 1 to to 409 4094 4. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. DSLi DS Lite te work work mo mode de Indi Indica cate tess that that th thee IPv4 IPv4 pack packet et is en enca caps psul ulat ated ed in into to th thee IPv6 IPv6 packet and transmitted through IPv6 tunnel. This work work mode is only enabled for the DS-Lite solution. l Off: Indicates the DSLite work mode is disabled. l Auto: Indicates that the IP address and domain name of the peer device at the tunnel are automatically automatically obtained using RA or DHCP protocol. l Static: Indicates that the IP address and domain name information of the peer device at the tunnel are manually entered. When this mode is used, you need to enter the AFTR domain name which must be consistent with that on the BRAS. AFTR name Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indicates the IP address or domain name of the peer device at the tunnel. AFTR is short for address family transition router router.. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) l 194 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) WAN Configuration - bridge a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Advanced Configuration > WAN Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set Mode to Bridge WAN, as shown in Figure 4-16. Figure 4-16 WAN Configuration - bridge b. Click Apply. Table 4-3 describes the parameters related to the WAN WAN in bridge mode. Table 4-3 4 -3 Parameters related to the WAN in bridge mode Parameter Description Enable WAN Connection Indicates whether to enable the WAN connection. Encapsula Enca psulation tion Mo Mode de Indicates Indicates tthe he enc encapsul apsulation ation mode mode of a WAN interfac interface. e. It can can be set to IPoE or PPPoE. Pr Prot otoc ocol ol Type ype Issue 01 (2019-09-20) In Indi dica cate tess tthe he prot protoc ocol ol ty type pe of a WAN in inte terf rfac ace. e. It ca can n be be se sett tto o IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4/IPv6 dual stack. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 195 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Mode Indicates the WAN interface mode. It can be set to Bridge WAN or Route WAN. Ser ervi vicce List List Indi Indica cate tess the the ser servic vice ty type pe of th thee WAN in inte terf rfaace. ce. It is al alw ways se sett to INTERNET . Enab Enable le VLA LAN N Sele elects cts th this chec check kb box ox to se sett VLA VLAN N ID ID and and 802. 802.1 1p p prrio iori rity ty.. VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. It ranges from 1 to 4094. The VLAN ID must be the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT. 802.1p policy Indicates the 802.1p priority policy. l Use specified value: indicates that a specified priority value is used. If you select this option, you need to set the 802.1p parameter.. parameter l Copy from IP precedence: indicates that the priority is copied from the ToS field in the IP header of the user-side packets. If the received packet is not an IP packet or the packet does not carry the 802.1p priority priority, , the default priority is used. If you select this option, you need to set802.1p the Default 802.1p parameter.. parameter Bi Bind ndin ing g opt optio ions ns Used Used to bind bind the the WAN in inte terf rfac acee tto o the the LAN LAN por portt o orr to to the the wire wirele less ss SSID. NOTE Before setting the binding options, set the work mode of the LAN port to route or set the wireless SSID. The binding options can be set only after the work mode or wireless SSID is successfu successfully lly set. For details, see 4.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration, 4.6.7.1 2.4G Basic Network Settings and 4.6.7.3 5G Basic Network Settings. Multic Mul ticast ast VLA VLAN N ID The mul multic ticast ast VLA VLAN N ID ranges ranges from from 1 tto o 4094. 4094. The multicast VLAN ID must be the same as the multicast VLAN ID on the OLT. NOTE l WAN in route mode: The ONT functions as a gateway. The IP address of the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, Static, or PPPoE. The IP address of the PC connected to the ONT can be obtained from the DHCP address pool of the ONT or can be set manually. l WAN in bridge mode: The ONT functions as a relay and does not process data. The ONT does not obtain the IP address allocated by the upper-layer device and it does not allow manual configuration of a static IP address. The IP address of the device connected to the ONT can be obtained through DHCP, PPPoE, or static. l In the case of the DHCP mode, you need to set the DHCP relay. After configuration is complete, the user-side IP address is obtained from the upper-layer device. For the detailed procedure, see 4.6.2.3 DHCP Server Configuration. l In the case of the PPPoE mode, the user-side IP address is obtained through PPPoE authentication of the upper-layer device. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 196 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.2 LAN Configuration This topic describes how to configure the LAN port or DHCP Parameters through the Web Web page. 4.6.2.1 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration > Layer 2/3 Port Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine whether the LAN port works in layer 3 mode, as shown in Figure 4-17. Figure 4-17 Layer 2/3 Port Configuration NOTE If the check box corresponding to the LAN port is selected, it indicates that the LAN port works in layer 3 mode, mode, that is, the gateway mode; if the check box corresponding to the LAN port is deselected, it indicates that the LAN port works in layer 2 mode, that is, the bridge mode. By default, the check boxes corresponding to all LAN ports are deselected, that is, all LAN ports work in layer 2 mode. 2. Click Apply. 4.6.2.2 LAN Host Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration > LAN Host Configuration. In the pane on the right, set the management IP address of Primmary Address and Secondary Address, as shown in Figure 4-18. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 197 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-18 LAN host configuration NOTE The IP address of the device connected to the LAN port must be in the same subnet as the management IP address. In this way, you can access an ONT through the Web page and perform the query and management. 2. Click Apply. 4.6.2.3 DHCP Server Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration > DHCP Server Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure the LAN side DHCP address pool for the ONT that functions as a gateway. gateway. After the configuration, the PC connected to the LAN port can automatically obtain an IP address from the address pool, as shown in Figure 4-19. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-19 DHCP Server Configuration 2. 198 Click Apply. Table 4-4 4 -4 describes the parameters related to the DHCP server. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 199 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-4 4 -4 Parameters related to the DHCP server Parameter Description Enable primary DHCP server Indicates whether to enable the primary DHCP server. server. If the check box is selected, you can set the primary DHCP server. Enable DHCP L2 Relay Indicates whether to enable the DHCP L2 Relay. The DHCP relay is a process in which cross-subnet forwarding of DHCP broadcast packets is implemented between between the DHCP client and the DHCP server. In this manner, the DHCP clients in different physical subnets can obtain IP addresses which are dynamically allocated from the same DHCP server. l If Mode of the WAN port is Route, the IP address of the ONT is obtained from upper-laye upper-layer serversIPinaddresses different subnets andr DHCP the user-side are obtained from the DHCP address pool of the ONT. ONT. l If Mode of the WAN port is Bridge, the ONT functions as a bridge. In this way, way, the ONT does not have an IP address. The user-side IP addresses are obtained from upper-layer DHCP servers in different subnets. Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address in the IP address pool on the primary DHCP server. End IP Address Indicates the end IP address in the IP address pool on the active DHCP server. Leased Time Indicates the lease time of the IP address pool on the active DHCP server. server. Options: minute, hour, day, and week. Enable secondary DHCP server Indicates whether to enable the secondary DHCP server. server. If the check box is selected, you can set the secondary DHCP server. IP Address Indicates the IP address of the secondary DHCP server. Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the secondary DHCP server. Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address in the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 200 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description End IP Address Indicates the end IP address in the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server. Leased Time Indicates the lease time of the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP DHCP server. server. Options: minute, hour, day, day, and week. Option60 Indicates the option 60 field of the secondary DHCP server. A user-side DHCP client can obtain an IP address from the IP address pool on the secondary DHCP server only when the option 60 field carried by the user-side DHCP client is the same as this setting. Option43 Indicates the option 43 field of the secondary DHCP server, identifying a TFTP server. NTP Server Primary DNS Server Inputs the IP addres addresss of the NTP server. server. Inputs the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary DNS Server Inputs the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 4.6.2.4 DHCP Static IP Configuration 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration tab, and choose DHCP Static IP Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set MAC address and IP address, as shown in Figure 4-20. Figure 4-20 DHCP Static IP Configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 201 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Click Apply. 4.6.2.5 DHCPv6 Server Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration DHCPv6 Server Configuration tab,the and choose from theaddress navigation tree on the left. In pane on the right, you can configure the LAN si side de pool for the ONT that functions as a gateway, as shown in Figure 4-21. Figure 4-21 DHCPv6 Server Configuration 2. Click Apply. 4 -5 lists the DHCPv6 Server Configuration parameters. Table 4-5 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 202 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-5 4 -5 DHCPv6 Server Configuration parameters Parameters Description IPv6 address Indicates tth he management IIP P address of IIP Pv6. T Th he default v vaalue is fe80::1. To configure the management IP address for IPv4, choose LAN > LAN Host Configuration. Par areent pr pref efix ix Indic ndicat atees the the pare parent nt prefi refix x sourc ourcee. Usua suall lly y an Inte Interrnetnet-ty type pe WAN port is used as the parent parent prefix source. By default, the first created IPv6 Internet WAN port is used as the parent prefix source. If the value is left empty, no prefix will be obtained, which may result in service unavailability. unavailability. Ch Chil ild d pre prefi fix xm mas ask k Used Used for for LAN LAN IP ad addr dres esss aall lloc ocat atio ion. n. This This pa para rame mete terr nee needs ds to be configured when the obtained prefix is shorter than 64 bits. For example, if the obtained prefix is 2012:1111:2222::/48, 2012:1111:2222::/48, and the child prefix mask value is set to 0:1:1:3333::/64, the generated IPv6 address prefix is 2012:1111:22 2012:1111:2222:3333::/64. 22:3333::/64. Address/Prefix assignment mode Indicates the address/prefix assignment mode. It can be set to DHCPv6 or stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC). When it is set to SLAAC, ULA Mode must be set. Other information assignment mode ULA Mode l DHCPv6: indicates that the LAN-side host obtains addresses in DHCPv6 mode. l SLAAC: indicates that the LAN-side host obtains addresses in ND mode. In SLAAC SLAAC mode, the host automatically configures addresses. The address information contains the prefix advertised by the local router and the interface identifier of the host. If there is no router on the link, the host has to automatically configure the link local address to communicate with local nodes. Indicates the assignment mode of other information. Other information refers to the IPv6 address in payloads of packets such as DNS packets. l DHCPv6: indicates that the address is obtained in DHCPv6 mode. l SLAAC: indicates that the address is obtained in ND mode. Indicates the unique local IPv6 address (ULA) mode. A ULA address starts with a prefix fd. Similar to a reserved IPv4 address, the reserved IPv6 address is used for private purpose. This is to ensure protocol consistency. This parameter can be set to Manual, Automatic, or Prohibit . Prohibit is recommended. l Prohibit: This function is disabled. l Automatic: The system automatically assigns addresses. l Manual: The address needs to be entered. If this option is selected, Prefix, Prefix Length, Preferred Lifetime, and Valid Lifetime also need to be set. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 203 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameters Description Prefix Indicates the network address space. IPv6 uses a prefix to indicate the network address space. For example, 2001:251:e000::/48 indicates an address space with a 48-bit prefix. Pre refi fix x Leng Length th Indic ndicat atees the the pr pref efix ix le leng ngth th,, whic which h is a dec decimal imal val alue ue.. It sp speeci ciffie iess the number of left-most bits used to form a prefix in an address. The address prefix is expressed in the "IPv6 address/prefix length" format. For example, 2001:251:e000::/48 indicates an address space with a 48-bit prefix. Pr Pref efer erre red d Lif Lifet etim imee Indi Indica cate tess the the per perio iod d of tim timee for for whic which h a val valid id add addre ress ss is is in th thee preferred state. state. When the preferred preferred lifetime expires, expires, the address becomes out of date. date. Valid lid Lif Lifeetim time Indic ndicat atees tthe he peri perio od o off ti tim me ffor or whic which h an an add addre ress ss is vali valid. d. The valid lifetime must be longer than the preferred lifetime. When the valid lifetime expires, the address becomes invalid. 4.6.2.6 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration Click Advanced Configuration > LAN Configurationtab, and choose DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, you can assign an IP address to a MAC address using the interface ID and IPv6 GUA address. The IPv6 GUA address is a combination of the interface ID and prefix configured on the LAN side, as shown in Figure 4-22. Figure 4-22 DHCPv6 Static IP Configuration 4.6.2.7 DHCPv6 Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose Advanced Configuration > LAN Configuration > DHCPv6 Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the total number of addresses, Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 204 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) the remaining number of IP addresses, the DUID, and IPv6 address/prefix, as shown in Figure 4-23. Figure 4-23 DHCPv6 information 4.6.3 Security Configuration This topic describes how to configure the security through the Web page 4.6.3.1 IPv4 Firewall Level Configuration 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose IPv4 Firewall Level Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, set the firewall level, as shown in Figure 4-24. Figure 4-24 IPv4 Firewall level configuration configuration 2. Click Apply. 4.6.3.2 DoS Configuration 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose DoS Configuration in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the DoS attack-preventive configuration, as shown in Figure 4-25. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 205 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-25 DoS Configuration 2. Click Apply. Denial of service (DoS) attack is a network-based attack that denies users from accessing the Internet. The DoS attack initiates a large number of network connections, making the server or the program running on the server break down or server resources exhaust or denying users to access the Internet service. As a result, the network service fails. 4.6.3.3 IPv4 Address Filtering 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose IPv4 Address Filtering in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, enable the IP address filter function. After selecting the filter mode, click New. Then, in the dialog box that is displayed, configure configure the rule for filtering filtering IP addresses from from the WAN WAN interface to the LAN port, as shown in Figure 4-26. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 206 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-26 IPv4 Address Filtering 2. Click Apply. The IP address filter function is a security mechanism configured on the residential gateway. It enables or disables all or partial ports in an Intranet IP address segment to communicate with all or partial ports in an Extranet IP address segment. The IP address filter configuration is used to limit communication between an Intranet device and an Extranet device. Table 4-6 4 -6 describes the parameters related to the IPv4 address filter. Table 4-6 4 -6 Parameters related to the IPv4 address filter Parameter Description Enable IP Filter Indicates whether to enable the IP address filte terr function. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 207 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Filter Mode Indicates the IP address filter rule of the blacklist or whitelist. l Blacklist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed to pass. l Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in i n the filter rule list is allowed to pass. l Hybrid: indicates that packets are filtered based on the upstream or downstream direction. Certain IP packets in the upstream or downstream direction are (not) allowed to pass through. Only one of the preceding modes can be selected. Protocol Indicates the type of the protocol, which may be TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ALL. Priority Indicates the Priority of the IP address.When Filter Mode is selected in the hybrid mode,this parameter can be configured. l Direction Range:0–255. Indicates the direction to which the filter rule applies. l Bidirectional: This value is available only when Filter Mode is Blacklist or Whitelist. The value cannot be changed. l Upstream: When this value is selected in the hybrid mode, the filter rule applies to the upstream direction. In the hybrid filter mode, only Upstream or Downstream can be selected. l Downstream: When this value is selected in the hybrid mode, the filter rule applies to the downstream direction. LAN-side Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address on the LAN side. LAN-side End IP Address Indicates the end IP address on the LAN side. LANLA N-si side de TCP TCP Por Portt Indi Indica cate tess tthe he port port ID on th thee LAN LAN si side de.. T Thi hiss p par aram amet eter er ca can n be be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP or TCP. LANLA N-si side de UDP UDP Por Portt Indi Indica cate tess tthe he port port ID on th thee LAN LAN si side de.. T Thi hiss p par aram amet eter er ca can n be be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP or UDP. WAN AN-s -sid idee IIP P Add Addre ress ss Indi Indica cate tess tthe he IP ad addr dres esss on on the the WAN si side de.. WAN AN-s -sid idee T TCP CP Port Port Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of th thee WAN si side de po port rt.. Th This is pa para rame mete terr ccan an be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP or TCP. WAN AN-s -sid idee U UDP DP Port Port Indi Indica cate tess tthe he ID of th thee WAN WAN si side de po port rt.. Thi Thiss par param amet eter er ca can n be be configured when Protocol is set to TCP/UDP or UDP. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 208 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Action Indicates the IP filter action. When Filter Mode is selected in the hybrid mode,this parameter can be configured. l Accept: accepts packets that meet the IP filter rule. l Drop: drops packet that meet the IP filter rule. 4.6.3.4 MAC Address Filtering 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose MAC Address Filtering in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, after enabling MAC filter filter and selecting the filter mode, click New. On the dialog box that is displayed, configure the MAC filter rule for the PC to access the Internet, as shown in Figure 4-27. Figure 4-27 MAC Address Filtering 2. Click Apply. The MAC address lists of PCs in the network are saved on the ONT. Configuring MAC filter rules enables the PCs that conform to the rules to access the Internet service or disables the PCs that do not conform to the rules to access the Internet service. A PC may have more than one IP addresses but but a unique MAC address. Therefore, configuring MAC filter rules effectively controls the Internet service access access rights of PCs in a LAN. Table 4-7 4 -7 describes the parameters related to the MAC filter. Table 4-7 4 -7 Parameters related to the MAC address filter Parameter Description Enable MAC filter Indicates whether to enable the MAC address filter function. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 209 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Filter Mode Indicates the MAC address filter rule of the blacklist or whitelist. l Blacklist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is not allowed to pass. l Whitelist: indicates that the data meeting the rule in the filter rule list is allowed to pass. The filter mode is global config mode. Thus, the blacklist and whitelist mode cannot be used at the same time. Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC address filter rule. 4.6.3.5 Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering in the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, select Enable WAN MAC filter, set the filter mode, and click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, configure the SSID-based MAC address filter rule, as shown in Figure 4-28. Figure 4-28 Wi-Fi MAC Address Filtering 2. Click Apply. Table 4-8 4 -8 describes the configuration parameters for wireless network MAC filtering. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 210 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-8 4 -8 Parameters for wireless network MAC filtering Parameter Description Enable WLAN MAC filter Enables or disables the WLAN MAC filter function. Filter mode Indicates the MAC filter mode. It can be set to Blacklist or Whitelist. l Blacklist: forbids data packets that match rules in the blacklist to pass through. l Whitelist: allows data packets that match rules in the whitelist to pass through. The blacklist or whitelist mode is a global configuration. The two modes cannot be used at the same time. SSID index Indicates the SSID index of the WLAN for which MAC address filtering is configured. Source MAC address Indicates the source MAC address in the MAC filter rules. 4.6.3.6 Parental Control Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose Parental Control in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, configure different constraints for the network surfing time and website access on working days and holidays. In this way, their children are allowed to access networks in specified time segments and free from age inappropriate contents, as shown in Figure 4-29. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 211 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-29 Parental Control NOTE Configure the template by following the instructions provided in the wizard. You can click Help in the upper right to view the online help about the template configuration if required. 4.6.3.7 Precise Device Access Control Click Advanced Configuration > Security Configuration tab, and choose Precise Device Access Control in the navigation tree on the left. Click New. In the displayed window, window, set LAN port, SSID or WAN port information, including Priority, Protocol and Mode,as shown in Figure 4-30. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 212 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-30 Parental Control 4.6.3.8 Device Access Control 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configutation > Security Configutation > Device Access Control. In the pane on the right, configure the rule of ONT access control, as shown in Figure 4-31. Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible for any related subsequences. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 213 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-31 Device Access Control 2. Click Apply. 4.6.3.9 WAN Access Control Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Security Configuration > WAN Access Control Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters of the W WAN AN access control, as shown in Figure 4-32 Complete network security planning before enabling remote access control to ensure that ONTss are logged in to in secure network conditions. After the ONT login operations are ONT complete, disable remote access control in a timely manner. If you do not complete network security planning or do not disable remote access control in a timely manner, the network may become faulty or be attacked, and Huawei will not be responsible for any related subsequences. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 214 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-32 WAN Access Control Configuration 2. Click Apply. 4.6.4 Route This topic describes how to configure the default route and static route through the Web page. 4.6.4.1 Default IPv4 Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Route > Default IPv4 Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, select or deselect the Default Route option button to enable or disable the default route of the system, as shown in Figure 4-33. Figure 4-33 Default IPv4 Route Configuration Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 215 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) NOTE If an ONT fails to find a matching routing entry after receiving a packet, the WAN interface specified by the default route configuration sends the packet to a network device. Before the default route of the system is enabled, the WAN interface must obtain the IP address. Therefore, the parameters of the WAN interface must be correctly set. For details, see 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. 4.6.4.2 IPv4 Static Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Route > IPv4 Static Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the static route, as shown in Figure 4-34. Figure 4-34 IPv4 Static Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 4-9 4 -9 describes the parameters related to the static route. Table 4-9 4 -9 Parameters related to the static route Parameter Description Address Fo Format Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indicates tth he format o off an address, wh which ca can be in IP IP address or domain name format. When both the destination IP address and the domain name are configured, only the destination IP address takes effect. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 216 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description IP Address Indicates the destination IP address of the static route. This parameter must be configured configured when the IP address format is specified for Address Format. Domain name Indicates the domain name of the static route. This parameter must be configured when the domain name formats is specified for Address Format. The wildcard domain names in the following formats are supported: *.abc.com, abc.com.*, and abc.*.com. The wildcard domain names in the following format are not supported: *abc.com, abc*.com, and a*c.com. a*c.com. Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the static route. Gateway Indicates the gateway IP address of the static route. WAN Name Indicates the WAN interface that the route travels through. 4.6.4.3 IPv4 Dynamic Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Route > IPv4 Dynamic Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the dynamic route, as shown in Figure 4-35. Figure 4-35 IPv4 Dynamic Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. 4 -10 describes the parameters related to the dynamic route. Table 4-10 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 217 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-10 4 -10 Parameters related to the dynamic route Parameter Description Enable RIP Controls whether the RIP function configured on the WAN port takes effect. effect. Protocol Type Indicates the RIP protocol type. It is used for dynamic route learning and route advertisement. Mode Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Key l RIPv1: does not support packet authentication. When this protocol type is selected, selected, the authentication mode automatically changes to None. l RIPv2: supports packet authentication. l RIPv1_v2: supports both RIPv1 and RIPv2. Indicates the RIP protocol working mode. Its values are Active and Passive. l Active: advertises and automatically learns routes. l Passive: only automatically learns routes but does not advertise routes. Indi Indica cate tess tthe he pa pack cket et au auth then enti tica cati tion on mo mode de.. It It iiss us used ed for for authentication on route learning and advertisement packets. l When RIPv1 is selected, the authentication mode cannot be edited and is set to None. l When RIPv1_v2 is selected, the authentication mode works for only RIPv2 and RIPv1 packets are not authenticated. Indicates the key required for packet authentication. l It cannot be set if the authentication mode is None. l It is mandatory if the authentication mode is Plaintext, MD5, or HMAC-SHA256 . NOTE When the authentication mode is Plaintext, the input plaintext is displayed as asterisks (*). Interface Name Indicates the name of a WAN port, which is used to associate a port configured using a dynamic route. By default, default, it is the name of every WAN port. 4.6.4.4 IPv4 VLAN Binding Configuration 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Route tab and then choose IPv4 VLAN Binding Configuration from the navigation tree. In the right pane, Click to need to configure the port VLAN binding column in the the tab to set the port VLAN VLAN binding relationship, as shown in Figure 4-36. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 218 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-36 IPv4 VLAN Binding Configuration 2. Click Apply. 4.6.4.5 IPv4 Service Route Configuration 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Route tab. In the navigation tree on the left, choose IPv4 Service Route Configuration. In the right pane, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set related related service route parameters, parameters, as shown shown in Figure 4-37. Figure 4-37 IPv4 Service Route Configuration C onfiguration NOTE The configuration takes effect when the device works in the bridge mode, and the corresponding WAN must be bridgin bridging-type g-type WAN. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 219 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Click Apply. 4.6.4.6 IPv4 Routing Table Click the Advanced Configuration > Route tab, and choose IPv4 Routing Table from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, routing information of the device is displayed, including the destination IP address, destination subnet mask, gateway, and outgoing interface, as shown in Figure 4-38. Figure 4-38 IPv4 Routing table 4.6.4.7 Default IPv6 Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Route > Default . In the pane on the right, select or deselect the Enable the IPv6 Route Configuration Default Route option button to enable or disable the default route of the system, as shown in Figure 4-39. Figure 4-39 Default IPv6 Route Configuration NOTE If an ONT fails to find a matching routing entry after receiving a packet, the WAN interface specified by the default route configuration sends the packet to a network device. Before the default route of the system is enabled, the WAN interface must obtain the IP address. Therefore, the parameters of the WAN interface must be correctly set. For details, see 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 220 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.4.8 IPv6 Static Route Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Route > IPv6 Static Route Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the static route, as shown in Figure 4-40. Figure 4-40 IPv6 Static Route Configuration 2. Click Apply. Table 4-11 lists the configuration parameters for a static route. Table 4-11 St Static atic route parameters parameters Parameter Description Dest Destin inat atio ion n IIP PP Pre refi fix x This This pa para rame mete terr nee needs ds to be se sett whe when n the the ob obta tain ined ed pref prefix ix is shorter than 64 bits. It is used for LAN IP address allocation. Next Hop Indicates the destination IP address of the static static route. WAN Name Indicates the WAN interface that the static route traverses. 4.6.5 Forward Rules This topic describes how to configure the DMZ, port mapping, and port trigger through the web page. 4.6.5.1 DMZ Function 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Forward Rules tab, and choose DMZ Function in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the DMZ, as shown in Figure 4-41. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 221 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-41 DMZ Function 2. Click Apply. The demilitarized zone (DMZ) is a technology that enables the ONT to forward all received packets through a specified specified internal server. server. The The technology enables a computer in the LAN to be completely exposed to all users on the Internet Internet or enables the mutual mutual communication without restrictions between a host with a specified IP address and other users or other servers on the Internet. In this way, many applications can run on the host with the specified IP address. The host with the specified IP address receives all connections and files that can be identified. If the LAN-side device does not provide website service or other network services, do not set the device to a DMZ host because all ports of a DMZ host are opened to the Internet. Table 4-12 4 -12 describes the parameters related to the DMZ. Table 4-12 4 -12 Parameters related to the DMZ Parameter Description Enable DMZ Indicates whether to enable the DMZ. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface. If the WAN interface is not in the port mapping table, the application requests from the WAN connection are directly forwarded to the host in the DMZ. Host Address Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indicates the IP address of the DMZ host. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 222 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.5.2 IPv4 Port Mapping Port mapping indicates that the Intranet server is allowed to be open to the Extranet (for example, the Intranet provides the Extranet with a WWW server or FTP server). Port mapping is to map the Intranet host IP address and port ID to Extranet IP address and corresponding port ID so that users from from Extranets can access access the Intranet server server.. With port m mapping, apping, the users cannot see the Intranet IP address and they see the Extranet IP address. Navigation Path 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Forward Rules tab, and choose IPv4 Port Mapping. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to port mapping, as shown in Figure 4-42. Figure 4-42 IPv4 Port Mapping 2. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 223 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Configuration Example Enable the packets sent from the WAN side to the ONT whose the destination WAN port number is 2000 to be forwarded to the LAN-side PC whose IP address is 192.168.100.20, and the port number is changed to 3000. Parameter Description Table 4-13 4 -13 describes the parameters related to IPv4 port mapping. Table 4-13 4 -13 Parameters related to IPv4 port mapping Parameter Description En Enab able le Port Port Mapp Mappin ing g Indi Indica cate tess w whe heth ther er to en enab able le port port mapp mappin ing. g. Mapping Name Indicates the name of the port mapping rule. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface where port mapping is enabled. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 224 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Internal Host Indicates the IP address of the host to which the port is mapped. Protocol IndTCP, icate, sUDP, the ,por rotTCP/UDP. ocol type .of port mapping packet, which may be TCP UDP TCP/UDP Star Startt E Ext xter erna nall P Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess tthe he dest destin inat atio ion n ssta tart rt port port of th thee eext xter erna nall d dat ataa pac packe ket. t. En End d Ext Exter erna nall Por Port: t: Indi Indica cate tess tthe he dest destin inat atio ion n en end d por portt o off th thee ex exte tern rnal al data data pack packet et.. Star Startt Inte Intern rnal al Po Port rt Indi Indica cate tess the the in inte tern rnal al dest destin inat atio ion n st star artt port port of th thee port port mapp mappin ing g packet. End End IIn nter ternal nal P Po ort Indi Indica cate tess tthe he in inte terrna nall d deest stin inaati tio on end end port port of th thee por port ma mappin pping g packet. Start External Source Port Indicates the source start port of the external data packet. End Externa Externall Source Source Port Port Indicates Indicates the so source urce end port port of the extern external al data data packet. packet. External Source IP Address Indicates the source IP address of the external data packet. 4.6.5.3 Port Trigger Configuration 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Forward Rules tab, and choose Port Trigger Configuration. In the pane on the right, click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters related to the port trigger, as shown in Figure 4-43. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 225 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-43 Port Trigger Configuration 2. Click Apply. The port trigger indicates that a specific Extranet port is automatically enabled when a corresponding Intranet port sends a packet and the packet is mapped to the Intranet port on the host.A specific mapping packet is sent from the ONT through the Intranet so that specific packets of the Extranet Extranet can be mapped to the corresponding host. A specified port on the gateway firewall is open to some applications for remote access. The port trigger can dynamically enable the open port of the firewall. Table 4-14 4 -14 describes the parameters related to the port trigger. Table 4-14 4 -14 Parameters related to the port trigger Parameter Description Enab Enable le Por ortt Tri Trigg gger er Indi Indica cate tess w wh het ethe herr to to eena nab ble th thee por portt ttrrig igge gerr. WAN Name Indicates the name of the WAN interface where the port trigger is enabled. Trigger P Prrotocol Indicates tth he pr protocol tty ype of of th the po port ttrrigger pa packet, wh which may be TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Open Protocol Indicates the protocol type of the open data packet. Sta tarrt T Trrigge iggerr P Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess the the de dest stin inat atio ion n ssta tarrt por portt of of tth he p por ortt ttrrig igge gerr pac packe ket. t. End End Trigge iggerr Por ortt Indi Indica cate tess the the de dest stin inat atio ion n end end por port of th thee por port trig trigge gerr pa paccke ket. t. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 226 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Start Op Open P Po ort Indicates tth he de destination st start p po ort o off th the o op pen pa packet. End O Op pen Port Indicates tth he destination end po port o off the open pa packet. 4.6.6 Application This topic describes how to configure functions such as Time Setting through the Web page. 4.6.6.1 Time Setting 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Application tab, and choose Time Setting in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the system time, including the SNTP server, time zone, and daylight saving time (DST), as shown in Figure 4-44. Figure 4-44 Time Setting 2. Click Apply. Table 4-15 4 -15 describes the parameters related to the system time. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 227 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-15 4 -15 Parameters related to the system time Parameter Description Auto Synchronization Network Time Time Server Indicates whether to enable the auto synchronization network time server, that is, SNTP server. Pr Prim imar ary y SNT SNTP P Ser Serve verr Indi Indica cate tess tthe he prim primar ary y SNT SNTP P ser serve verr. Secondar Seco ndary y SNTP SNTP Serve Serverr Indicates Indicates the secondary secondary SNTP server server.. Time Zone Indicates the time zone. Time Synchronization Cycle Indicates whether to enable the DST. DST Start Time Indicates the DST start time. DST End Time Indicates the DST end time. NOTE If the SNTP server is configured based on domain name format, a static route or a default route must be configured. If the static route or default route is not configured, the ONT will fail to obtain time from the SNTP sever. 4.6.6.2 Media Sharing 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Application tab, and choose Media Sharing in the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the media sharing settings, as shown in Figure 4-45. Figure 4-45 Media Sharing 2. Click Apply. 4.6.6.3 ALG Configuration 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Application > ALG Configuration. In the pane on the right, determine determine whether to enable enable the FTP or TFTP TFTP,, as shown in Figure . 4-46 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 228 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-46 ALG Configuration 2. Click Apply. When the NAT NAT function is enabled, the application level gateway (ALG) function needs to be enabled to ensure that some application software and hardware can be normally used. 4.6.6.4 DDNS Function 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Application tab and then choose DDNS Function from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure configure DDNS parameters, including Service Provider, Host Name, Service Port, Domain Name, Username, and Password, as shown in Figure 4-47. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 229 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-47 DDNS Function 2. Click Apply. Dynamic domain name service (DDNS) associates a static domain name with the dynamic IP address of its host. Assume that server A provides HTTP or FTP service and it is connected to the Internet using routers. If server A obtains an IP address through DHCP DHCP,, or server A is connected to the Internet through PPPoE, PPTP, or L2TP, the IP address is an dynamic IP address. That is, its IP address may change each time when server A initializes its connection to the Internet. The mapping between the domain name and IP address provided by the domain name service (DNS) server is static, and the mapping does not update when the IP address changes. Therefore, when the IP address of server A changes, users on the Internet cannot access server A with domain names. With DDNS, which associates a static domain name with the dynamic IP address of its host, users on the Internet can access the server only with domain names. 4.6.6.5 UPnP Function 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Application tab, and choose UPnP Function in the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, determine whether to enable the UPnP, as shown in Figure 4-48. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 230 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-48 UPnP Function 2. Click Apply. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is the name of a group of protocols. The UPnP supports zero configuration networking and automatic discovery of different network devices. If the UPnP is enabled, the UPnP-enabled device can be dynamically connected to the network to obtain the IP address, obtain the transfer performance, discover other devices, and learn the performance of the other devices. The UPnP-enabled UPnP-enabled device device can be automatically disconnected from the network, without affecting the device or other devices. When the UPnP is enabled, the LAN-side PC automatically finds the ONT, which is considered as a peripheral device of the PC and is plug-and-play. plug-and-play. After running application software on the PC, port mapping entries are automatically generated on the ONT through the UPnP protocol, thus improving the running speed. 4.6.6.6 IGMP Configuration 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Application tab and then choose IGMP Configuration fromnthe navigation In the right pane, configure the IGMP parameters, as shown show in Figure 4-49tree. . Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 231 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-49 IGMP configuration 2. Click Apply. The IGMP function of WAN ports can be enabled only when IGMP works in the gateway mode. Only when IGMP Mode is Proxy, parameters such as Robustness, General query interval, General query response time, Specific query number, Specific query interval, and Specific query response time. 4.6.6.7 Intelligent Channel Configuration NOTE After over-the-top (OTT) service flows are configured and services become normal, you can configure the intelligent channel according to the following description to ensure the OTT service bandwidth and thereby improve service experience. 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Application tab, and choose Intelligent Channel Configuration from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, select Intelligent Channel Enabled, and click New. In the dialog box that is displayed, configure the intelligent channel, as shown in Figure 4-50. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-50 Intelligent channel configuration 2. 232 Click Apply. Table 4-16 4 -16 describes the intelligent channel parameters. Table 4-16 4 -16 Intelligent channel parameters Parameter Description Intelligent Channel Enabled Enables or disables the intelligent channel function. Inbound Port Indicates the port through which packets come in the ONT. The port must be the same as the LAN port that is bound to the WAN port of the intelligent channel service. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 233 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description VLAN Indicates the VLAN carried by packets when packets reach the inbound port. This parameter is not used for live-network services and thereby does not need to be configured. Protocol No. Domain Indicates the Layer 3 protocol type of packets. Indicates the Layer 3 protocol type of packets. The following lists the numbers of common protocols: l TCP: 6 l UDP: 17 l IGMP: 2 l ICMP: 1 Indicates the domain name of the intelligent channel. When both the destination IP address and the domain name are configured, the destination IP address takes precedence over over the domain name (that (that is, the domain name does not take effect.) The wildcard domain names in the following format are supported: *.abc.com, abc.com.*, and abc.*.com. The wildcard domain names in the following format are not supported: *abc.com, abc*.com, and a*c.com. Destination IP Address/Mask Indicates the destination IP address and mask of packets related to the intelligent channel service. The IP address can be an address or an address segment. Generally, only the destination IP address and mask need to be configured. Source IP Address/Mask Indicates the source IP address and mask of packets related to the intelligent channel service. The IP address can be an address or an address segment. Destination Port Range Indicates the destination TCP/IP port of packets. It can be a consecutive port range. range. Source Port Range Indicates the source TCP/IP port of packets. It can be a consecutive port range. DSCP Re-marked Indicates the DSCP value to be remarked. A DSCP Re marked Indicates the DSCP value to be remarked. A greater DSCP value indicates a higher 802.1p priority. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 234 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description 802.1p Re-marked Indicates the 802.1p value to be remarked, which is generated through association with the DSCP value. The 802.1p value is calculated based on the most significant 3 bits of the DSCP value. 4.6.6.8 Static DNS 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > Application tab and then choose Static DNS from the navigation tree. In the right pane, configure DNS parameters, and you can also configure static DNS domain name resolution, as shown in Figure 4-51. Figure 4-51 Static DNS Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 235 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Click Apply. 4.6.6.9 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping Click the Advanced Configuration tab, and choose DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping from the navigation tree on the left.On the right pane, set can set the mapping rule and Pbit of the Default Mapping, as shown inFigure 4-52. Figure 4-52 DSCP-to-Pbit Mapping A mapping rule indicates a newly added DSCP mapping profile. In the example, profile 1 is set and DSCP value is 7, the mapped Pbit is 0; DSCP values 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, and 19, the mapped Pbit is 1. Different priorities are separated by semicolon (;). Field Pbit of the Default Mapping indicates the priority to which a DSCP value maps. In this field, values 0-7 are permitted. If no DSCP value is specified in Mapping Mapping Rule, the value set in Pbit of the Default Mapping takes effect. 4.6.7 WLAN This topic describes how to perform 2.4G&5G basic and advanced configurations of the WLAN through the Web page. 4.6.7.1 2.4G Basic Network Settings 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose 2.4G Basic Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the basic parameters of the 2.4G 2.4G Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 4-53. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-53 2.4G Basic Network Settings 2. 236 Click Apply. Table 4-17 4 -17 describes the basic parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network. Table 4-17 4 -17 Basic wireless network configurations Parameter Description Enable WLAN Indicates whether to enable the wireless network. The following parameters can be set only when the wireless network is enabled. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 237 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description SSID Name Indicates the name of the wireless network. It is used to differentiate different different wireless networks. It consists of a maximum of 32 characters, without Tab character. A default SSID1, named WirelessNet is created after the creation of an ONT.. The system can configure up to four SSIDs at a time and ONT cannot assign IP addresses to Wi-Fi terminals by SSID. Enable SSID Specifies whether to enable the connection. Associated Device Number Specifies the number of STAs. It ranges from 1 to 32. Broadcast SSID Indicates whether to enable or hide broadcast. l If the option box is selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is enabled. The ONT periodically broadcasts the SSID, SSID, that is, the name of the wireless network. In this way, any STA can search for the wireless network. l If the option box is not selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is disabled. The SSID is hidden, and the STA cannot search for the wireless network. The SSID can be obtained only through through a request. WMM Enable Specifies whether to enable Wi-Fi multimedia. Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he au auth then entic ticat atio ion n mod modee ffor or th thee ST STA tto o req reque uest st access to the wireless network. The mode can be Open, Shared, WPA Pre-Shared Key, WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA/ WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise, or PA/WPA2 Enterprise. Enterpris e. It is set to open by default, that is, the STA can access the network without authentication. Encr Encryp ypti tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe henetwork. encr encryp ypti tion on mode de for for tthe hemode STA to to re reque qu est acce ccess to the wireless Themo encryption and encryption parameters vary with the authentication mode. mode. l If the authentication mode is set to Open, the encryption mode can be set to None or WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to Shared, the encryption is WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to WP WPA A Pre-Shared Key, WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA/WP WPA/WPA2 A2 Pre-Shared Pre-Sha red Key , WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise or WPA/WPA2 Enterprise , the encryption mode can be set to AES, TKIP, or TKIP&AES. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 238 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) NOTE l The security mode and encryption configured on a Wi-Fi terminal must be the same as those of an ONT. If the TKIP&AES, or AES encryption mode is not configured on the Wi-Fi terminal, the WiFi terminal may have an old-version driver. If so, update the driver version. l When two SSIDs are configured, if you modify the information of an SSID, the other SSID will rechoose a channel, causing the service to be interrupted for a few minutes. l The WPS function can be used on SSID1 for only one band. In addition, do not enable WPS for multiple SSIDs in the same band. Otherwise, a Wi-Fi connection abnormality may occur. 4.6.7.2 2.4G Advanced Network Settings 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose 2.4G Advanced Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the basic parameters of of the 2.4G Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network, as shown shown in Figure 4-54. NOTE This page is empty if Enable WLAN is not selected in 2.4G Basic Network Settings. Figure 4-54 2.4G Advanced Network Settings 2. Click Apply. Table 4-18 4 -18 describes the Wi-Fi parameters of the 2.4G Wi-Fi network. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 239 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-18 4 -18 Wireless network advance parameters Parameter Description TX Power Indicates the transmit optical power of wireless signals. It can be set to 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, or 100%. The larger the value, the better the coverage of wireless signals. Regu Regula lato tory ry Do Doma main in Indi Indica cate tess the the co coun untr try y co code de of th thee wi wire rele less ss netw networ ork. k. Channel Indicates the channel of the wireless network. The channel varies with the value of Regulatory Domain. Channel Width Indicates the wireless channel width. It can be set to Auto 20/40 MHz, 20 MHz or 40 MHz. Mode Indicates the supported wireless network mode. It can be set to 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11b/g, or 802.11b/g/n . DTIM Period Indicates the delivery period of the delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). The value ranges from 1 to 255, and the default value is 1. Beacon P Peeriod Indicates tth he de delivery pe period of of th the be beacon. T Th he be beacon is is us used to contact other access point devices or network control devices. The value ranges from 20 ms to 1000 ms, and the default value is 100 ms. RTS T Th hreshold Indicates tth he rreequest tto o se send (R (RTS) th threshold. It It iiss us used to to avoid conflicts in data transmission in the wireless LAN. The smaller the RTS threshold, the higher the transmission frequency of RTS packets, and the faster of the system recovers from an interruption or conflict. However, However, more bandwidths are used, which affects affects the throughput of other network data packets. The value ranges from 1 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. Fragmenta Frag mentation tion Thresho Threshold ld Indic Indicates ates the fr fragmen agmentt threshold threshold.. When When the size size of a packet packet is greater than this threshold, the packet will be fragmented. If the transmission of fragments is interrupted, only the parts that are not successfully transmitted need to be retransmitted. The value ranges from 256 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. 4.6.7.3 5G Basic Network Settings 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose 5G Basic Network Settings from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the basic parameters of the 5G 5G Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 4-55. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-55 5G Basic Network Settings 2. Click Apply. The table below describes the basic parameters of the 5G Wi-Fi network. Table 4-19 4 -19 Basic wireless network configurations Parameter 240 Description Enable WLAN Indicates whether to enable the wireless network. The following parameters can be set only when the wireless network is enabled. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 241 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description SSID Name Indicates the name of the wireless network. It is used to differentiate different different wireless networks. It consists of a maximum of 32 characters, without Tab character. A default SSID1, named WirelessNet is created after the creation of an ONT.. The system can configure up to four SSIDs at a time and ONT cannot assign IP addresses to Wi-Fi terminals by SSID. Enable SSID Specifies whether to enable the connection. Associated Device Number Specifies the number of STAs. It ranges from 1 to 32. Broadcast SSID Indicates whether to enable or hide broadcast. l If the option box is selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is enabled. The ONT periodically broadcasts the SSID, SSID, that is, the name of the wireless network. In this way, any STA can search for the wireless network. l If the option box is not selected, it indicates that the SSID broadcast function is disabled. The SSID is hidden, and the STA cannot search for the wireless network. The SSID can be obtained only through through a request. WMM Enable Specifies whether to enable Wi-Fi multimedia. Auth Au then enti tica cati tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe he au auth then entic ticat atio ion n mod modee ffor or th thee ST STA tto o req reque uest st access to the wireless network. The mode can be Open, Shared, WPA Pre-Shared Key, WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA/ WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise, or PA/WPA2 Enterprise. Enterpris e. It is set to open by default, that is, the STA can access the network without authentication. Encr Encryp ypti tion on Mo Mode de Indi Indica cate tess tthe henetwork. encr encryp ypti tion on mode de for for tthe hemode STA to to re reque qu est acce ccess to the wireless Themo encryption and encryption parameters vary with the authentication mode. mode. l If the authentication mode is set to Open, the encryption mode can be set to None or WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to Shared, the encryption is WEP. l If the authentication mode is set to WP WPA A Pre-Shared Key, WPA2 Pre-Shared Key, WPA/WP WPA/WPA2 A2 Pre-Shared Pre-Sha red Key , WPA Enterprise, WPA2 Enterprise or WPA/WPA2 Enterprise , the encryption mode can be set to AES, TKIP, or TKIP&AES. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 242 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) NOTE l The security mode and encryption configured on a Wi-Fi terminal must be the same as those of an ONT. If the TKIP&AES, or AES encryption mode is not configured on the Wi-Fi terminal, the WiFi terminal may have an old-version driver. If so, update the driver version. l When two SSIDs are configured, if you modify the information of an SSID, the other SSID will rechoose a channel, causing the service to be interrupted for a few minutes. l The WPS function can be used on SSID1 for only one band. In addition, do not enable WPS for multiple SSIDs in the same band. Otherwise, a Wi-Fi connection abnormality may occur. 4.6.7.4 5G Advanced Network Settings 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose 5G Advanced Network Settings from the navigation navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the basic parameters of the 5G 5G Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network, as shown in Figure 4-56. NOTE This page is empty if Enable WLAN is not selected in 5G Basic Network Settings. Figure 4-56 5G Advanced Network Settings 2. Click Apply. 4 -20 describes the Wi-Fi parameters of the 5G Wi-Fi network. Table 4-20 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 243 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Table 4-20 4 -20 Wireless network advance parameters Parameter Description TX Power Indicates the transmit optical power of wireless signals. It can be set to 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, or 100%. The larger the value, the better the coverage of wireless signals. Regu Regula lato tory ry Do Doma main in Indi Indica cate tess the the co coun untr try y co code de of th thee wi wire rele less ss netw networ ork. k. Channel Indicates the channel of the wireless network. The channel varies with the value of Regulatory Domain. Channel Width Indicates the wireless channel width. It can be set to Auto 20/40/80 MHz, Auto 20/40 MHz, 20 MHz or 40 MHz. Mode Indicates the supported wireless network mode. It can be set to 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11b/g, or 802.11b/g/n . DTIM Period Indicates the delivery period of the delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). The value ranges from 1 to 255, and the default value is 1. Beacon P Peeriod Indicates tth he de delivery pe period of of th the be beacon. T Th he be beacon is is us used to contact other access point devices or network control devices. The value ranges from 20 ms to 1000 ms, and the default value is 100 ms. RTS T Th hreshold Indicates tth he rreequest tto o se send (R (RTS) th threshold. It It iiss us used to to avoid conflicts in data transmission in the wireless LAN. The smaller the RTS threshold, the higher the transmission frequency of RTS packets, and the faster of the system recovers from an interruption or conflict. However, However, more bandwidths are used, which affects affects the throughput of other network data packets. The value ranges from 1 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. Fragmenta Frag mentation tion Thresho Threshold ld Indic Indicates ates the fr fragmen agmentt threshold threshold.. When When the size size of a packet packet is greater than this threshold, the packet will be fragmented. If the transmission of fragments is interrupted, only the parts that are not successfully transmitted need to be retransmitted. The value ranges from 256 bytes to 2346 bytes, and the default value is 2346 bytes. 4.6.7.5 Automatic WiFi Shutdown 1. Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose Automatic WiFi Shutdown from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, configure the scheduled WiFi time segment, to use, enable the WiFi to be when shutdown the WiFi network is not in as shown in network Figure 4-57 . automatically shut down Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-57 Automatic WiFi Shutdown 2. Click Apply. 4.6.7.6 WiFi Coverage Management 1. 244 Click the Advanced Configuration > WLAN tab, and choose WiFi Coverage Management from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, specify the SSID used for smart WiFi coverage and add the identified external AP devices to the WiFi network, as shown in Figure 4-58 and Figure 4-59. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 4-58 Wi-Fi Parameter Configuration Figure 4-59 Wi-Fi Network Management 245 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 246 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Click Apply. 4.6.8 Voice This topic describes how to configure the voice service through the Web page. NOTE HN8055Q does not support this web page. NOTE The Web page for configuring the voice service varies with the voice protocols. The following topics describe the Web pages after the H.248 protocol and the SIP protocol are loaded. 4.6.8.1 VoIP Basic Configuration l VoIP Basic Configuration - SIP Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Advanced Configuration > Voice > VoIP Basic Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters of a VoIP interface can be configured, including the IP addresses of of the primary server and secondary server, and digitmap. i. Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss fo forr a voice voice int interf erfac ace. e. Figure 4-60 Interface basic parameters–SIP parameters–SIP protocol Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) ii. 247 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Config Configure ure basi basicc param paramete eters rs for for a SI SIP P voice voice u user ser.. Figure 4-61 User basic parameters–SIP protocol b. Click Apply. Table 4-21 4 -21 describes the parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. Table 4-21 4 -21 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Outbound Proxy Server Address Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP outbound server. This server IP address overrides the primary server IP address. Specifically Specifically,, when IP addresses addresses of both the primary outbound server server and the primary primary server are configured, the primary server IP address does not take effect. Outbound Proxy Server Port Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Outbound Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary Port SIP outbound server. Port of the Standby Outbound Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP outbound server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 248 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Address of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary SIP proxy server. Port of the Primary Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the primary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Address of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary SIP proxy server. Port of the Standby Proxy Server Indicates the ID (provided by the ISP) of the port used for communication between the secondary SIP proxy server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Home Domain Indicates the domain of the registration server of the VoIP terminal in network communications, such as softx3000.huawei.com. Local Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 5060. Digitmap Indicates the voice digitmap. Digi Digitm tmap ap Mat Match ch M Mod odee Indi Indica cate tess th thee digi digitm tmap ap mat match chin ing g mode mode,, incl includ udin ing g Min Min an and d Max. l Min: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system immediately reports the number to the call proxy. l Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the call proxy but starts the short timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the system reports the number to the call proxy after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the call proxy. Regi Regist stra rati tion on Peri Period od Indi Indica cate tess tthe he vali valid d re regi gist stra rati tion on peri period od.. When When th this is peri period od expires, the SIP user needs to register again. The value range is 1s to 65534s, and the default value is 600s. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Media Port Indicates the media streams WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the SIP server. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 249 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Enable User Enables or disables a SIP user. The SIP user starts the registration only after being enabled. URI Indicates the SIP user identifier. It uniquely identifies a SIP user and the value must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Regist Reg istrat ration ion User User Name Name Indica Indicates tes the name name used used for for S SIP IP user user regist registrat ration ion.. It is is generally the user phone number. Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port Indi Indica cate tess th thee POT POTS S port port aass ssoc ocia iate ted d with with the the SIP SIP use userr. Authentication User Name Indicates the user name used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. Password Indicates the password used for authentication on the IMS. It must be the same as the configuration on the IMS. l VoIP basic Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Advanced Configuration > Voice > VoIP basic Configuration. In the pane on the right, parameters of a VoIP interface can be configured, including the address of the primary primary MGC, device name, name, and region, as shown in Figure 4-62 and Figure 4-63. i. Config Configure ure the basic basic par parame ameter terss fo forr a voice voice int interf erfac ace. e. Figure 4-62 basic Interface parameters - H.248 protocol Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) ii. 250 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Confi Configure gure basic parameter parameterss for for an an H H.248– .248–based based voice user. user. Figure 4-63 basic User parameters - H.248 protocol b. Click Apply. Table 4-22 4 -22 describes parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. Table 4-22 4 -22 Parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Basic Interface Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Address of the Primary MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the primary MGC server. Port of of the Primar Primary y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the primary MGC server and the VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Address of the Standby MGC Indicates the IP address (provided by the ISP) of the secondary MGC server. Port of of the Standb Standby y MGC Indicates Indicates the ID (provided (provided b by y the ISP) ISP) of of the port used used for for communication between the secondary MGC server and the t he VoIP terminal. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. MG Domain Fill the domain name when MID Format is set to Domain Name, such as user.huawei.com. user.huawei.com. MG Port Indicates the ID of the local port on the ONT. The ID ranges from 1 to 65535 and the default ID is 2944. Device Name Fill the device name when MID Format is set to Device Name. MID Format Indicates the MG registration format. It can be the MG domain name, IP address, or device name. The MG register format must be the same as the register format provided by the ISP. ISP. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 251 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Digitmap Matching Mode Indicates the digitmap matching mode, including Min and Max. l l Min: If the character stringreports matches digitmapto the scheme, thedialed system immediately thea number softswitches. Max: If the dialed character string matches a digitmap scheme, the system does not immediately report the number to the softswitches but starts the short timer. If a user does not continue dialing digits, the t he system reports the number to the softswitches after the short timer times out; if the user continues dialing digits and the number matches the long digitmap, the system reports the number that matches the digitmap to the softswitches. Enable Digitmap Automatch Enables or disables the function of digitmap auto match. RTP TID Prefix Indicates tth he index of of the ephemeral tteerminatio ion n. Th The de default prefix on Huawei softswitches softswitches is A100. Start Number of RTP TID Indicates the start number of RTP TID. The default start number is 0. Width of RTP TID Number Indicates the width of RTP TID. The default number is 6. Signaling Port Indicates the signaling WAN port used for connecting the VoIP terminal to the MGC server. Media Port Indicates the WAN port of the voice media streams. When the name of the media port is empty, empty, it indicates that the name of the media port is the same as that of the signaling port. Region Indicates the country code. Basic User Parameters(H.248) Parameters(H.248) Enab Enable le Physi hysiccal T TIID Enab Enable less or or dis disaabl blees an an ON ONT PO POTS port port.. Physical TID Indicates the POTS port identifier. Asso Associ ciat ated ed P POT OTS S Port Port Indi Indica cate tess th thee bind bindin ing g of a POT POTS S port port aand nd a phy physi sica call term termin inal al.. 4.6.8.2 VoIP Advanced Configuration l VoIP Advanced Configuration - SIP protocol a. II IIn n the the na navi viga gati tion on ttre reee on the the llef eft, t, ccho hoos osee Advanced Configuration > Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure parameters of a VoIP user, user, including the register user name, authentication authentication user name, password, and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 4-64 and Figure 4-65. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 252 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-64 VoIP advanced configuration - advanced parameters (SIP protocol) Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 253 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-65 VoIP advanced configuration - physical Port parameters (SIP protocol) b. Click Apply. Table 4-23 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol. protocol. Table 4-23 4 -23 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the SIP protocol Parameter Description Advanced Profile Parameters(S Parameters(SIP) IP) Enable Echo Enables or disables echo cancellation. By default, echo cancellation is Cancellation enabled. Enable Subscribe Enables or disables subscription of user rights. When the server type is NGN SIP, SIP, this function is disabled. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 254 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Silence detection Indicates a silence detection method for a network call. This method is used to detect silence in full-duplex and half-duplex modes, isolates voice from background noise, and and filters out redundant audio audio data. Silence detection function controls the global mode in silence compression mode. Silence compression mode Fax Transmode Supports 2 modes: l Codec mode: In Advanced User Parameters(SIP), select Silence compression . Then, you can set G.711MuLaw, G.711ALaw, G.729 and G.722. l Global mode: Select Silence detection, and you can configure all coding/decoding modes. Indicates the fax mode, including pass-through and T.38. T.38. l Pass-through: The MG encodes the fax signals transmitted by a fax machine according to the voice codec (G.711), and then coverts such signals into the RTP data packets for real-time transmission over an IP network. l T.38: The MG, through ITU-T T.38, converts the T.30-compliant fax signals transmitted by a fax machine into the T.38 packets for transmission over an IP bearer network. Fax Switch Mode Indicates the fax switching mode, including negotiation and self-switch. The fax switching mode is selected according to the customer requirements. Profile Parameters Indicates the control point parameters. Such parameters are selected according to the softswitch. Generally, the default settings are adopted. Software Parameters Indicates the software parameters. Such parameters are selected according to the softswitch. Generally, Generally, the default settings are adopted. Digitmap Short Timer Indicates the short timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digitmap Long Timer Indicates the long timer of the digitmap. This timer starts up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. Shared User Mode Specifies whether to bind telephone numbers to phone ports. l Disabled: The shared user mode is disabled. l Parallel ringing: If this option is selected, only one telephone number can be configured. That is, all phone ports on the ONT share a telephone number.. All telephones ring together when an incoming call iiss made. If number two telephone numbers are configured, this option is invalid. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Multihomin g Mode The multi-homing mode supports multiple IP addresses for one end point. That is, one end point can use multiple physical network ports. This improves the end point reliability. If this mode is enabled, two servers (active/standby) must be configured. l Disabled: The multi-homing mode is disabled. l Dual homing (not automatic switchback): Once an ONT is registered with a softswitch (no matter active or standby), the softswitch is always used as long as it works correctly. correctly. l Dual homing (automatic switchback): The ONT switches back to the active softswitch when detecting that the active softswitch recovers and is reachable. l Loading sharing: The ONT is registered with one of the addresses resolved from the domain name to ensure that multiple softswitches process services in load load sharing mode. DTMF Transmissio n Mode Specifies the DTMF signal transmission mode. DTMF signals can be transmitted transparently or in RFC2833 packets. RFC2833 Payload Type Specifies the payload value used for transmit DTMF signals in RFC2833 packets. It ranges ranges from 96 to 127. Voice Server Type Indicates the supported voice server type. Offhook DT-AS ACK 255 l IMS SIP Server: core network service type based on the SIP protocol. l Softswitch: softswitch NGN service type based on the SIP protocol. l H.248 Server: H.248 service type. Indicates the time during which the DT-A DT-AS S signal (detects whether a phone supports offhook CLIP) waits for a response from the phone. Interval Advanced User Parameters(SIP) Parameters(SIP) Code Codecc In Indi dica cate tess eenc ncod odin ing/ g/de deco codi ding ng.. In In en enco codi ding ng,, tthe he DSP DSP enc encod odes es TDM TDM voic voicee data into packets and sends the packets to the IP network. In decoding, the DSP decodes the voice packets received from the network and sends the data to the TDM side. Four types of codec are supported: G.711MuLaw, G.711MuLaw, G. 711ALaw,, G.729, and G.722; and supports silence compression. 711ALaw Packet Pack et Ti Time me Indicates Indicates the interv interval al at which which the DSP assemb assembles les voice voice packets. packets. Differe Different nt encoding modes support different packetization periods. The period can be 10 ms, 20 ms, or 30 ms, and the default period is 20 ms. Pr Prio iori rity ty En Enab able led d Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indi Indica cate tess the the cod codec ec prio priori rity ty.. T Two wo us user erss nego negoti tiat atee the the prio priori rity ty in des desce cend ndin ing g order.. Currently, priorities 1-4 are supported, with 1 being the highest order priority. priority. Indi Indica cate tess whe wheth ther er the the use userr ccar arri ries es the the co code decc (en (enab able le:: ccar arry ry;; d dis isab able le:: not not carry). Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 256 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description DSP TX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the local POTS side to the remote IP side. DSP RX Gain Indicates the direction in which gain takes effect: from the remote IP side to the local POTS side. Enabled HotLine Enables or disables the hotline function. HotLine Number Indicates the hotline number. After the user specifies a number as the hotline number and also enables the hotline function, the number is automatically dialed if the user does not dial the number following a delay time expiration after offhook. HotLine Delay Indicates the period over which the user does not dial the number after offhook. Enable Call Forwarding Enables the call forwarding unconditional (CFU) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can unconditionally forward all incoming Uncondition al calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox. Call Forwarding Uncondition al Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding Busy Enables the call forwarding busy (CFB) function. A called party-side service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox when the user is busy on another call. Call Forwarding Busy Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Enable Call Forwarding on No Reply Enables the call forwarding on no reply (CFNR) function. A called partyside service, with which, a user can forward all incoming calls to a designated forwarded-to forwarded-to number or a voice mailbox if the calls are not answered within a preset period. Call Forwarding on No Reply Number Indicates the forwarded-to number number.. Call Waiting Waiting A calle called d party-side party-side service service,, with which, which, if user C calls calls user A when when user user A is talking with user B, user A hears a call waiting (CW) tone indicating that there is an incoming call. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 257 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Message Waiting Indicator This indicator on the phone is on when receiving a new message for a user who is provisioned with the voice mailbox service. Three-party Call When user A is communicating with user B and user C wants to jjoin oin the call, user A can call user C without disconnecting the call with user B. In this case, these 3 users can communicate with each other or two of three can communicate with each other. Call Holding A user in a call can hold this call. Malicious Call Identificatio n A called party-side service, with which, a user can identify the calling number if the user receives a malicious call. Caller ID Display A called party-side service allows the number of the calling party to be presented to the called called party. party. Anonymous Call This service does not allow the number of the t he calling party who registers this service to be presented to the called party. party. Call Transfer Enables or disables the call transfer function. Physical Port Parameters (SIP) Ringing Voltage Indicates the voltage when a phone rings. DC Volt oltage age Indica Indicates tes the DC volt voltage age on a voice voice port. port. Port TX gain Indicates the Tx gain on a port. Port RX gain Indicates the Rx gain on a port. Lower Threshold for Flash Hooking Duration Indicates the lower threshold for flash hooking (press the flash button). This function is used for call transfer from an external call to an internal call. Upper Threshold for Flash Hooking Indicates the upper threshold for flash hooking. Duration On-hook Confirmatio n Time Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Indicates the onhook confirmation time. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 258 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Impeda Imp edance nce Indica Indicates tes the impeda impedance nce of the connec connected ted device device.. Feed Feed current supplies power to speech circuits, which requires only current Current but no voltage. CLIP Format Specifies the CLIP format that is supported by the connected phone, including Mdmf-FSK , Sdmf-FSK , Dtmf, R1.5, and Etsi. FSK Transmissio n Delay Indicates the delay before FSK signals are issued. CLIP Flow l After ring: the number of the calling party is presented after ringing. l Before ring: the number of the calling party is presented before ringing. Enable DSP Template This function can only be used for maintenance and cannot be enabled. Polarity Enables or disables polarity reversal on a POTS port. This function is Reversal on POTS Port usually used for charging. Display Time in CLIP Enables or disables time synchronization on a phone. After this function is enabled, the ONT issues time to the phone. Enable DSP HighPass Filter Enables this function to mask the low frequency (lower than 50 Hz) interference on the phone. Enable Forced FSK Transmissio n Enables or disables forced FSK transmission. NOTE Physical Port Parameters specify the POTS port physical parameters and the parameter names use the standard terms, which are unnecessary to be described here. l VoIP Advanced Configuration - H.248 Protocol a. In the the n nav avig igat atio ion n tr tree ee o on n the the le left ft,, choo choose se Advanced Configuration > Voice > VoIP Advanced Configuration. In the pane on the right, you can configure the line name and associated POTS, as shown in Figure 4-66. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 259 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-66 VoIP advanced configuration - H.248 protocol Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) b. 260 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Click Apply. Table 4-24 describes the advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol. protocol. Table 4-24 4 -24 Advanced parameters used for configuring a VoIP interface based on the H.248 protocol Parameter Description Enable Enab le Echo Cancellatio Cancellation n Echo is mainly produced produced in the the PSTN PSTN user, user, the the echo of of user port allows remote users users feel the affects affects call quality and. Fax Transmode The fax can be divided into fax pass through (G.711), T.38 fax (T.38 encoding). Fax Swi witc tch h Mo Mod de Wheth hetheer to parti artici cipa pate te in th thee SIP si sign gnaali ling ng,, fax fax ty type pe can be divided into consultations fax, since switching the fax. Profile Index The system has built-in universal profile index, if does not meet the demand, according to the actual specific configuration Profile index. Profile Parameters If the profile index is User-defined , configure the profile parameter according according to actual configurations. configurations. Soft Parameter Select the default software parameters. Start Sta rt Nego Negotia tiate te V Vers ersion ion H.248 H.248 vers version ion of tthe he nego negotia tiatio tions ns base based d on the profil profilee parameter.. parameter Digi Digitm tmap ap St Star artt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess the the sta start rt ti time merr of of the the di digi gitm tmap ap.. T Thi hiss time timerr ssta tart rtss up when a user picks up the phone and hears the dialing tone. If the user does not dial digits within the time specified by the timer, the call is released. Digi Digitm tmap ap Sho Short rt Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee shor shortt ti time merr of the the d dig igit itma map. p. T Thi hiss time timerr star starts ts up up if a number that matches digitmap A is dialed and then matches digitmap B. Digi Digitm tmap ap Lon Long g Tim Timer er Indi Indica cate tess th thee long long tim timer er of the the d dig igitm itmap ap.. This This tim timer er st star arts ts up up if the dialed digits comply with the dialing scheme but one more digit is required. NOTE Physical Interface Parameters and Advanced User Parameters specify the POTS port physical parameters and the par parameter ameter nam names es use the sta standard ndard term terms, s, which are u unnecessa nnecessary ry to be described described here. 4.6.8.3 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion Click the Advanced tab, and choose SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion from theConfiguration navigation tree>onVoice the left. 1. In the right pane, pane, you can can change change the VoIP VoIP protoc protocol ol (SIP (SIP or H.248) H.248) by changin changing g the value of the Voice parameter, as shown in Figure 4-67. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 261 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-67 SIP/H.248 Protocol Conversion NOTE Exercise caution when performing this operation because it will interrupt the ongoing call and delete current data. 2. Click Apply. 4.6.9 System Management This topic describes how to Manage the system on the W Web eb page, including the configuration of TR-069, Account Management and ONT Authentication. 4.6.9.1 TR-069 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > System Management > TR-069. In the pane on the right, set the parameters related to the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 server, as shown in Figure 4-68. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 262 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-68 TR-069 NOTE Configuring the interconnection between the ONT and the TR-069 requires creating a WAN interface. In addition, Service List of the WAN interface must contain the TR069. For details, see 4.6.1.1 WAN Configuration. 2. Click Apply. Table 4-25 4 -25 describes the TR-069 parameters. Table 4-25 4 -25 TR-069 parameters Parameter Description ACS Parameter Settings Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 263 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Parameter Description Enable Periodic Informing Indicates whether to enable the notification function. l If the notification function is enabled, the ONT actively l sends a connection request to the TR-069 server. If the notification function is disabled, the ONT does not actively send a connection request to the TR-069 server. server. When the notification function is enabled, the Period Inform Interval and Period Inform Time parameters can be set. In Info form rmin ing g IInt nter erva vall In Indi dica cate tess tthe he inte interv rval al for for the the ONT ONT to to ssen end d a con conne nect ctio ion n rreq eque uest st to the TR-069 server. In Info forrmi ming ng Time ime Indic ndicat atees the the ti time me for for th thee ONT ONT to se sen nd a conn conneect ctio ion n requ requeest to the TR-069 server. ACS URL Indicates the address of the TR-069 server to which the ONT sends a connection request. ACS User ser Na Name Indic ndicat atees tthe he us useer n nam amee for th thee ONT ONT tto o rreegi gist ster er wi with th th thee TRTR-0 069 server. ACS Password Indicates the password for the ONT to register with the TR-069 server. Connection Request User Name Indicates the user name to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. Connection Request Password Indicates the password to be carried when the TR-069 server initiates a connection request to the ONT. DSCP Defined by RFC2474 "Definition of the Differentiated Services Field". Differentiated Services Services Code Point (DSCP) uses code values for priority marking. DSCP can be customized for ISPs based on service requirements requirements so that devices devices on a network perform QoS based based on the DSCP value. value. Enable Certificate Authentication Authentication and Set Private Key Password Enable Certificate Authentication Enable the certificate if the ACS is connected through SSL. Privat Pri vatee Ke Key y Passw Password ord Sets Sets the the priva private te k key ey pass passwor word d after after the certif certifica icate te is is enabl enabled. ed. Conf Confir irm m Pas Passw swor ord d Conf Confir irms ms the the pass passwo word rd an and d eens nsur ures es th that at it is th thee sa same me as Private Key Password. Import Certificate Certificate Indicates the certificate file provided by the ISP. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 264 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.9.2 Account Management 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > System Management > Account Management. In the right pane, change the password of the root user, as shown in Figure 4-69. Figure 4-69 Account Management NOTE 2. l After the user logs in to the ONT Web interface using the default common user name and password, the Account Management interface is automatically displayed, prompting the user password, to change the initial password. After the user successfully changes the password, the Account Management interface is no longer displayed in the following logins. l Change the initial user name and password after logging in to the web page. Click Apply. 4.6.9.3 Open Source Software Notice In the navigation tree on the left, choose Advanced Configuration > System Management > Open Source Software Notice. In the pane on the right, you can view the open source software notice for the product, as shown in Figure 4-70. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 265 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-70 Open Source Software Notice 4.6.9.4 ONT Authentication 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tre treee o on n the the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > System t he right, you can view or change Management > ONT Authentication Authentication. In the pane on the the authentication mode for the t he registration of the ONT on the OLT OLT, as shown in Figure 4-71. Figure 4-71 ONT Authentication 2. Click Apply. NOTE The user can modify the ONT SN or password by using the phone on condition that the ONT is offline. The modification is performed as follows: Connect the phone to the POTS port on an ONT, dial "**SN**SN#" or "**password**password#" , and then restart the ONT. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 266 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.10 Maintenance Diagnose This topic describes how to maintain the system on the Web page, including the method to restart the device, diagnose the fault and upgrade software version. 4.6.10.1 Software Upgrade 1. Click Advanced Configuration > Maintenance diagnose tab, and choose Software Upgrade. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the target software version of the device. Click Update to upgrade the software of the device, as shown in Figure 4-72. Figure 4-72 Software Upgrade 2. After the up upgrad gradee is su succes ccessful, sful, a message message is is displayed displayed indicating indicating that that the device device needs needs to be reset. Click Restart. The configuration data takes effect after the device is reset. 4.6.10.2 Configuration File Management Click Advanced Configuration > Maintenance diagnose tab, and choose Configuration File Management. in the navigation tree on the left. left. In the pane on the right, click the button as required as shown in Figure 4-73. Figure 4-73 Configuration File Management l Click Save to save the configuration file to the flash memory. This prevents data loss d due ue to the restart of the device. l Click Save and Restart to save the configuration file and reboot the ONT. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 267 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) l Click Download Configuration File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the configuration file, and then back up the file to the local disk. l Click Browse following the Configuration File text box. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the configuration file to be uploaded. Click Update Configuration File to upload the configuration file that is saved in the local disk. After the configuration file is successfully uploaded, the device automatically restarts and then the new configuration takes effect. Before uploading the configuration file, choose the configuration file with the correct type and the name of the selected configuration file must not be the same as that of any file saved in the device. Otherwise, the configuration file fails to be uploaded. When IE8 is used for configuration file downloading and you click the t he save button 10s-over later after downloading, the downloaded configuration file is incomplete. 4.6.10.3 Maintenance In the navigation tree on the left, choose Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose > Maintenance. 1. In the the pane pane on the rright, ight, enter the ttarge argett IP addre address ss or host name name in in Target and WAN name, and then click Start, as shown in Figure 4-74. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 268 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-74 Ping test 2. – If the ping test is successful, The result is displayed as PASS, that is, the ONT can interwork with the device with the destination IP address. – If the ping test fails, The result is displayed as FAIL, that is, the ONT cannot interwork with the device with the destination IP address. In the the pan panee on the the righ right, t, clic click k Start Hardware Fault Detection to start hardware fault detection, as shown in Figure 4-75. Figure 4-75 Hardware fault detection 4.6.10.4 User Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose Advanced Configuration > System Management > User Log.In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 269 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 4-76 Figure 4-76 User Log l Save Log is enabled by default, It can not be configured on the Web page. l You cannot configure Log Level, which indicates the level of the saved log. The log whose level is equal to or higher than the debug-level log is saved. l Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 10s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 4.6.10.5 Firewall Log Click the Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose tab, and choose Firewall Log from the navigation tree on the left. In the pane on the right, you can viewl logs and download log files, as shown in Figure 4-77. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 270 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-77 Firewall Log Click Enable Firewall Log to enable or disable the function. If enabled, device forwarding performance will be deteriorated. Click New to configure the firewall rules. Click Download Log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path for saving the log file, and save the log file to the local disk. When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 15s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 4.6.10.6 Debug Log In the navigation tree on the left, choose Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose > Debug Log. In the pane on the right, click Download log File. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Save, specify the path of saving the log file, and save the file to the local disk, as shown in Figure 4-78. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web We b Page Reference (Enterprise) 271 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Figure 4-78 Debug Log When IE8 is used for log file downloading and you click the save button 10s-over later after downloading, the downloaded log file is incomplete. 4.6.10.7 Intelligent Channel Statistics 1. Click the Maintenanc Maintenancee Diagnose tab and choose Intelligent Channel Statistics from the navigation tree. In the right pane, select Enable Count to enable traffic statistics collection for intelligent channels, as shown in Figure 4-79. Figure 4-79 Intelligent Channel Statistics NOTE You can enable traffic statistics collection only when intelligent channels are configured and Intelligent Channel Enabled is selected on Application > Intelligent Channel Configuration. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 272 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.10.8 Fault Info Collect Click the Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose tab, and choose Fault Info Collect from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, click Start to collect ONT fault information, as shown in Figure 4-80. Figure 4-80 Fault Info Collect NOTE After the information is collected, click Download to download the collected information to a local directory. When IE8 is used for fault info collect and you click the save button 10s-over later after downloading, the downloaded fault info collect is incomplete. 4.6.10.9 Remote Mirror 1. In the naviga navigatio tion n tree tree on the lef left, t, choose choose Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose > Remote Mirror, as shown in Figure 4-81. Figure 4-81 Remote Mirror Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 273 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) Packets sent to and transmitted from the CPU can be remotely Obtained for analysis based on the configuration. configuration. 2. – Source IP Address: indicates the IP address of the WAN port where remote mirroring is performed. – Destination IP Address: indicates the IP address of the host where the result is located. – Type Type of the captured packets: indicates the type of the captured packets that are broadband, wifi and voice voice . click Start. NOTE Some third-party plug-ins, such as Google Chrome Frame, may lead to downloading failure. If such a failure occurs, disable the plug-in. Based on your requirements, this function may involve using, obtaining, or saving some information about users' communications for the purpose of safeguarding network operation and protecting services. Huawei alone is unable to collect or save the content of users' communications. It is suggested that you activate the interception-related functions based on the applicable laws and regulations in terms of purpose and and scope o off usage. Y You ou are oblig obligated ated to take considerab considerable le measures measures to ensure th that at the content content of users' communications is fully protected when the content is being used and saved. 4.6.10.10 VoIP Statistics Click the Advanced Configuration > Maintenance Diagnose tab, and choose VoIP statistics atistics Statistics from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, query voice quality st information and voice service abnormality records, as shown in Figure 4-82. Figure 4-82 VoIP Statistics Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 274 4 Web Page Reference (HN8055Q, HN8245Q) 4.6.11 Bundle This topic describes the bundle information on the web page. 4.6.11.1 Bundle Information On the Advanced Configuration > Bundle tab page, choose Bundle Information from the left navigation tree. In the right pane, you can query ID, name, and version, as shown in Figure 4-83. Figure 4-83 Bundle information Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 5 275 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) This topic describes the usage and meanings of the parameters on the web page. Before configuring and viewing the parameters on the web page, log in to the web page. For details about how to log in to the web page, see 5.1 Locally Logging in to the Web Interface. The web page of the EG8245Q/EG8247Q varies according to ONT capability sets. For bridging-type ONTs, ONTs, GUIs for Layer 3 and voice configurations configurations are not supported. For ONTs ONTs without Wi-Fi interfaces, GUIs for wireless network configurations are not supported. For details on ONT capability sets, refer to 7.1 Reference of GPON ONT Capability Sets. This topic uses figures of the EG8247Q accessed by the administrator (telecomadmin) as examples. Different ONTs may have different screencaptures, actual screencaptures prevail. Because different voice protocols, the Voice node contains different parameters. Only one of the SIP and H.248 protocols can be supported at a time. Which protocol is supported depends on the ONT used. The configuration window for an administrator is different from that for a common user. l Compared with a common user, an administrator has permissions to view and configure all parameters on the web page. A common user can configure and query some nodes and parameters and the queried information is less less than that queried by an administrator. This topic lists different nodes queried by a common user. For details, see the web page for a common user. 5.1 Locally Logging Logging in to the Web Interface This topic describes the data plan and procedure for logging in to the web configuration interface. Context Before setting up the configuration environment, ensure that data information listed in Table 5-1 is available. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 276 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Table 5-1 5 -1 Data plan Item Description User name and Default settings: password l Administrator (installation and maintenance personnel): – User name: Epadmin – Password: adminEp NOTE l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, You can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times within five minutes the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the BMS. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding. precedin g. For details, co contact ntact the co correspondin rresponding g ISP ISP.. CAUTION l l Please change the initial password to ensure administrator account security. l Do not provide terminal users with the password of the administrator account. The administrator account is used by the ISP for O&M. If a terminal user uses the administrator account, service parameters may be incorrectly incorrectly modifie modified d and servic services es may be affected. affected. Common user (terminal user): – User name: Epuser – Password: userEp NOTE l The common user account can be used to query the service status. For ONTs that support Wi-Fi and the USB storage function, the common user account can be used to configure services such as Wi-Fi and home sharing. l After logging in to the web page, if you do not perform any operations within five minute, you will be locked out and return back to the login interface. Then, You can unlock the account by entering the login user name and password. l Three times the user name and password input error, the system is locked and unlocked automatically after one minute. l Modify the password through the Web. l Certain ISPs may customize accounts and passwords, which are different from the default accounts and passwords listed in the preceding. precedin g. For details, co contact ntact the co correspondin rresponding g ISP ISP.. CAUTION Change the initial password after Common users log in to the web page. LAN IP address and subnet mask Default settings: l IP address: 192.168.18.1 l Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 277 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Item Description IP address and subnet mask of the PC Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as the LAN IP address of the ONT. For example: l IP address: 192.168.18.100 l Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Procedure Step 1 Use a network cable to connect the LAN port of the ONT to a PC. Step 2 Ensure that the Internet Explorer (IE) of the PC does not use the proxy server. The following section considers IE 6.0 as an example to describe how to check whether the IE uses the proxy server. server. 1. Star Startt the the IE , an and d ch choo oose se ToolsInternet from the main menu of the IE window. Then, theIE, Internet Options interface isOptions displayed. 2. In the Internet Options interface, click the Connections tab, and then click LAN settings. 3. In the Proxy server area, ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). check box is not selected (that is, without the "√" sign). If the check box is selected, deselect it, and then click OK. Step 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask of the t he PC. For details, see Table 5-1. Web configuration interface. Step 4 Log in to the Web 1. Enter http://192.168.18.1 in the address bar of IE (192.168.18.1 is the default IP address of the ONT), and then press Enter to display the login interface, as shown in Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1 Login interface NOTE The web page login supports SSL3.0,if TLS1.0, TLS1.1, It is recommended thatisyou use high-security TLS1.1 or TLS1.2 you log in to the and ONTTLS1.2. using https. The TCP port 80 used for listening for HTTPS packets. You need to type "https://192.168.18.1:80" in the address bar of IE and press Enter to log in to the ONT. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 278 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) In the login interface interface,, ente enterr the use name name and and password. password. For detail detailss about about default default settings settings of the user name and password, see Table 5-1. After the password authentication is passed, the Web Web configuration interface interface is displayed. ----End 5.2 Fast Setting This topic describes how to quickly set an ONT. ONT. Administrator NOTE l Only the ONT web page supports ONT WAN configurations. l For methods of setting ONT Authentication and WAN Configuration, see 5.6.9.4 ONT Authentication and 5.6.1.1 WAN Configuration. Common User NOTE l When the root root u user ser logs in to the ONT web page for the first time, this page is displayed. In other cases, you need to click Fast Setting on the upper right corner of the Home Page to go to this page. l For detailed account management operations, see 5.6.9.2 Account Management. 5.3 Home Page This topic describes the ONT common configurations, such as Wi-Fi Wi-Fi configuration, home sharing, and network status query. Auxiliary buttons on the upper right corner of the page can guide you to different pages. 5.4 One-click Diagnosis This topic describes how to quickly diagnose ONT network faults. 1. Choose One-click Diagnose from the navigation tree on the th e left panel. Then click On Oneet o diagnose the network status, as shown in Figure click Diagnose on the right panel to 5-2. Figure 5-2 One-click diagnosis Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 2. 279 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Figure 5-3 shows the diagnosis results. Figure 5-3 Diagnosis result NOTE This diagnosis method applies for only a professional engineer and it affects data services. Therefore, exercise caution when you use this diagnosis method. If you need to re-diagnose the faults, click Diagnose again. 5.5 System Information This topic describes how to query the information about the ONT ONT,, including ETH port information, optical information, and user device information through the Web page. 5.5.1 Device Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > Device Information. In the pane on the right, you can can view the product name, name, hardware version, version, and software version, version, as shown in Figure 5-4. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 280 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Figure 5-4 Device Information 5.5.2 WAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > WAN Information. In the pane on the right, you can can view the status of the WAN interface, mode mode of obtaining an IP address, IP address, and subnet mask, as shown in Figure 5-5 Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 281 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Figure 5-5 WAN Information NOTE Click a record in the WAN list, You can view more detailed information by clicking a record in the WAN lis list. t. If Encapsulation Mode is set to PPPoE and Dialing method is selected as Manual on the WAN Configuration WebPage, you can click Connected link to connect the current WAN port, click disconnected link to disconnect the current WAN port. 5.5.3 Optical Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > Optical Information. In the pane on the right, you can can view the optical status, transmit transmit optical power, power, receive optical power of the optical module, module, as shown in Figure 5-6. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 282 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Figure 5-6 Optical Information 5.5.4 Service Provisioning Status Click the System Information tab, and choose Service Provisioning Status from the navigation tree on the left. In the right pane, the ONT service provisioning status is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-7. Figure 5-7 Service Provisioning Provisioning Status Status 5.5.5 VoIP Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > VoIP Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the information such as user status and call status. The SIP configuration page is slightly different from the H.248 configuration page, as shown in Figure 5-8 and Figure 5-9. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 283 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) Figure 5-8 VoIP Information - SIP Figure 5-9 VoIP Information - H.248 If the VoIP service needs to be restarted, click Restart VoIP in the pane on the right. 5.5.6 Eth Port Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > Eth Port Information. In the pane on the right, you can view the duplex mode, speed, and status of the ETH port, as shown in Figure 5-10. Figure 5-10 Eth Port Information Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) 284 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q) 5.5.7 WLAN Information In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Information > WLAN Information. Then, in the pane on the right, you can query the information such as Wi-Fi port status, Wi-Fi packet statistics, and SSID, as shown in Figure 5-11. Issue 01 (2019-09-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei EchoLife ONT Web Page Reference (Enterprise) Figure 5-11 WLAN Information 285 5 Web Page Reference (EG8245Q, EG8247Q)
